Specifications | AMX MVP-7500/8400 Car Video System User Manual

Operation/Reference Guide
MVP-7500/8400
7.5" & 8.4” Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panels
Touch Panels
Last Revised: 2/18/2013
AMX Limited Warranty and Disclaimer
This Limited Warranty and Disclaimer extends only to products purchased directly from AMX or an AMX Authorized Partner which
include AMX Dealers, Distributors, VIP’s or other AMX authorized entity.
AMX warrants its products to be free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use for three (3) years from the date of
purchase, with the following exceptions:
•
Electroluminescent and LCD Control Panels are warranted for three (3) years, except for the display and touch overlay components are warranted for a period of one (1) year.
•
Disk drive mechanisms, pan/tilt heads, power supplies, and MX Series products are warranted for a period of one (1) year.
•
AMX lighting products are guaranteed to switch on and off any load that is properly connected to our lighting products, as long
as the AMX lighting products are under warranty. AMX also guarantees the control of dimmable loads that are properly connected to our lighting products. The dimming performance or quality there of is not guaranteed, impart due to the random combinations of dimmers, lamps and ballasts or transformers.
•
AMX software is warranted for a period of ninety (90) days.
•
Batteries and incandescent lamps are not covered under the warranty.
•
AMX AutoPatch Epica, Modula, Modula Series4, Modula CatPro Series and 8Y-3000 product models will be free of defects in
materials and manufacture at the time of sale and will remain in good working order for a period of three (3) years following the
date of the original sales invoice from AMX. The three-year warranty period will be extended to the life of the product (Limited
Lifetime Warranty) if the warranty card is filled out by the dealer and/or end user and returned to AMX so that AMX receives it
within thirty (30) days of the installation of equipment but no later than six (6) months from original AMX sales invoice date. The
life of the product extends until five (5) years after AMX ceases manufacturing the product model. The Limited Lifetime Warranty
applies to products in their original installation only. If a product is moved to a different installation, the Limited Lifetime Warranty
will no longer apply, and the product warranty will instead be the three (3) year Limited Warranty.
All products returned to AMX require a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number. The RMA number is obtained from the AMX
RMA Department. The RMA number must be clearly marked on the outside of each box. The RMA is valid for a 30-day period. After
the 30-day period the RMA will be cancelled. Any shipments received not consistent with the RMA, or after the RMA is cancelled, will
be refused. AMX is not responsible for products returned without a valid RMA number.
AMX is not liable for any damages caused by its products or for the failure of its products to perform. This includes any lost profits, lost
savings, incidental damages, or consequential damages. AMX is not liable for any claim made by a third party or by an AMX Authorized Partner for a third party.
This Limited Warranty does not apply to (a) any AMX product that has been modified, altered or repaired by an unauthorized agent or
improperly transported, stored, installed, used, or maintained; (b) damage caused by acts of nature, including flood, erosion, or earthquake; (c) damage caused by a sustained low or high voltage situation or by a low or high voltage disturbance, including brownouts,
sags, spikes, or power outages; or (d) damage caused by war, vandalism, theft, depletion, or obsolescence.
This limitation of liability applies whether damages are sought, or a claim is made, under this warranty or as a tort claim (including
negligence and strict product liability), a contract claim, or any other claim. This limitation of liability cannot be waived or amended by
any person. This limitation of liability will be effective even if AMX or an authorized representative of AMX has been advised of the
possibility of any such damages. This limitation of liability, however, will not apply to claims for personal injury.
Some states do not allow a limitation of how long an implied warranty last. Some states do not allow the limitation or exclusion of incidental or consequential damages for consumer products. In such states, the limitation or exclusion of the Limited Warranty may not
apply. This Limited Warranty gives the owner specific legal rights. The owner may also have other rights that vary from state to state.
The owner is advised to consult applicable state laws for full determination of rights.
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN THIS WARRANTY, AMX MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. AMX
EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES NOT STATED IN THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT
MAY BE IMPOSED BY LAW ARE LIMITED TO THE TERMS OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE LIMITED
BY APPLICABLE LAW, AMX RESERVES THE RIGHT TO MODIFY OR DISCONTINUE DESIGNS, SPECIFICATIONS, WARRANTIES, PRICES, AND POLICIES WITHOUT NOTICE.
AMX Software License and Warranty Agreement
•
LICENSE GRANT. AMX grants to Licensee the non-exclusive right to use the AMX Software in the manner described in this
License. The AMX Software is licensed, not sold. This license does not grant Licensee the right to create derivative works of the
AMX Software. The AMX Software consists of generally available programming and development software, product documentation, sample applications, tools and utilities, and miscellaneous technical information. Please refer to the README.TXT file on
the compact disc or download for further information regarding the components of the AMX Software. The AMX Software is subject to restrictions on distribution described in this License Agreement. AMX Dealer, Distributor, VIP or other AMX authorized
entity shall not, and shall not permit any other person to, disclose, display, loan, publish, transfer (whether by sale, assignment,
exchange, gift, operation of law or otherwise), license, sublicense, copy, or otherwise disseminate the AMX Software. Licensee
may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the AMX Software.
•
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT. You hereby acknowledge that you are an authorized AMX dealer, distributor, VIP or other AMX authorized entity in good standing and have the right to enter into and be bound by the terms of this Agreement.
•
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY. The AMX Software is owned by AMX and is protected by United States copyright laws, patent
laws, international treaty provisions, and/or state of Texas trade secret laws. Licensee may make copies of the AMX Software
solely for backup or archival purposes. Licensee may not copy the written materials accompanying the AMX Software.
•
TERMINATION. AMX RESERVES THE RIGHT, IN ITS SOLE DISCRETION, TO TERMINATE THIS LICENSE FOR ANY REASON UPON WRITTEN NOTICE TO LICENSEE. In the event that AMX terminates this License, the Licensee shall return or
destroy all originals and copies of the AMX Software to AMX and certify in writing that all originals and copies have been
returned or destroyed.
•
PRE-RELEASE CODE. Portions of the AMX Software may, from time to time, as identified in the AMX Software, include PRERELEASE CODE and such code may not be at the level of performance, compatibility and functionality of the GA code. The
PRE-RELEASE CODE may not operate correctly and may be substantially modified prior to final release or certain features may
not be generally released. AMX is not obligated to make or support any PRE-RELEASE CODE. ALL PRE-RELEASE CODE IS
PROVIDED "AS IS" WITH NO WARRANTIES.
•
LIMITED WARRANTY. AMX warrants that the AMX Software (other than pre-release code) will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of receipt. AMX DISCLAIMS ALL
OTHER WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH REGARD TO THE AMX SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES LICENSEE SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. Any supplements or updates to the AMX SOFTWARE,
including without limitation, any (if any) service packs or hot fixes provided to Licensee after the expiration of the ninety (90) day
Limited Warranty period are not covered by any warranty or condition, express, implied or statutory.
•
LICENSEE REMEDIES. AMX's entire liability and Licensee's exclusive remedy shall be repair or replacement of the AMX Software that does not meet AMX's Limited Warranty and which is returned to AMX in accordance with AMX's current return policy.
This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the AMX Software has resulted from accident, abuse, or misapplication. Any replacement AMX Software will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days, whichever is longer.
Outside the United States, these remedies may not available. NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. IN NO
EVENT SHALL AMX BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES
FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, OR ANY OTHER
PECUNIARY LOSS) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS AMX SOFTWARE, EVEN IF AMX HAS
BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. BECAUSE SOME STATES/COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW
THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO LICENSEE.
•
U.S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The AMX Software is provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication, or
disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph ©(1)(ii) of The Rights in Technical Data and
Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or subparagraphs ©(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software
Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable.
•
SOFTWARE AND OTHER MATERIALS FROM AMX.COM MAY BE SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL. The United States
Export Control laws prohibit the export of certain technical data and software to certain territories. No software from this Site may
be downloaded or exported (i) into (or to a national or resident of) Cuba, Iraq, Libya, North Korea, Iran, Syria, or any other country to which the United States has embargoed goods; or (ii) anyone on the United States Treasury Department's list of Specially
Designated Nationals or the U.S. Commerce Department's Table of Deny Orders. AMX does not authorize the downloading or
exporting of any software or technical data from this site to any jurisdiction prohibited by the United States Export Laws.
This Agreement replaces and supersedes all previous AMX Software License Agreements and is governed by the laws of
the State of Texas, and all disputes will be resolved in the courts in Collin County, Texas, USA. For any questions concerning this Agreement, or to contact AMX for any reason, please write: AMX License and Warranty Department, 3000 Research
Drive, Richardson, TX 75082.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
MVP Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels .................................................1
Overview .................................................................................................................. 1
MVP Specifications ................................................................................................... 1
MVP-BP Power Pack ...........................................................................................5
Overview .................................................................................................................. 5
MVP-BP Specifications .................................................................................................... 5
Installing MVP-BP Batteries ...................................................................................... 5
NXA-CFSP Compact Flash ..................................................................................7
Overview .................................................................................................................. 7
Compact Flash Card - Security .................................................................................. 7
Installing the NXA-CFSP Compact Flash Card........................................................... 7
Accessing the MVP’s Internal Components ..................................................................... 7
Removing the Installed Card ........................................................................................... 8
Installing the Compact Flash Upgrade Card .................................................................... 8
Wireless Interface Cards ...................................................................................11
802.11b Wireless Interface Card............................................................................. 11
Specifications ............................................................................................................... 11
NXA-WC80211GCF 802.11g Wireless Interface Card............................................. 12
Specifications
............................................................................................................. 13
Installing the 802.11g Card and Antenna ............................................................... 15
Firmware Requirements ................................................................................................ 15
Access the MVP’s Internal Components ........................................................................ 15
Removing the Installed Card ......................................................................................... 15
Preparing the MVP’s Rear Housing ............................................................................... 15
Installing the NXA-WC80211GCF.................................................................................. 16
Closing and Securing the MVP Enclosure ...................................................................... 16
Configuring Communications ...........................................................................19
Modero Setup and System Settings ....................................................................... 19
Accessing the Setup and Protected Setup Pages.......................................................... 19
Setting the Panel’s Device Number............................................................................... 20
Wireless Settings Page - Wireless Access Overview ............................................... 20
Hot Swapping................................................................................................................ 20
Configuring a Wireless Network Access ................................................................. 20
Step 1: Configure the Panel’s Wireless IP Settings ................................................. 21
Wireless communication using a DHCP Address ........................................................... 21
Wireless communication using a Static IP Address........................................................ 21
Using the Site Survey tool ............................................................................................. 22
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
i
Table of Contents
Step 2: Configure the Card’s Wireless Security Settings ........................................ 23
Configuring the Modero’s wireless card for unsecured access to a WAP200G ............. 24
Configuring the Modero’s wireless card for secured access to a WAP200G ................. 25
Automatically set SSID .................................................................................................. 26
Manually set SSID.......................................................................................................... 26
Configuring multiple wireless Moderos to communicate to a target WAP200G ........... 29
Step 3: Choose a Master Connection Mode ........................................................... 29
USB................................................................................................................................ 30
Prepare your PC for USB communication with the panel .............................................. 30
Configure the panel for USB communication ................................................................ 30
Configure a Virtual NetLinx Master using NetLinx Studio ............................................. 31
Ethernet ........................................................................................................................ 32
Master Connection to a Virtual Master via Ethernet ..................................................... 32
Using G4 Web Control to Interact with a G4 Panel ................................................ 35
Using your NetLinx Master to control the G4 panel ............................................... 37
Upgrading MVP Firmware ................................................................................39
Upgrading the Modero Firmware via the USB port ................................................ 40
Step 1: Configure the panel for a USB Connection Type .............................................. 40
Step 2: Prepare Studio for communication via the USB port ........................................ 40
Step 3: Confirm and Upgrade the firmware via the USB port ....................................... 41
Upgrading the Docking Station Firmware via USB ................................................. 43
Step 1: Prepare the Docking Station for firmware transfer via USB.............................. 43
Step 2: Upgrade the Docking Station firmware via USB ............................................... 44
Setup Pages ......................................................................................................47
Setup Pages ............................................................................................................ 47
Navigation Buttons........................................................................................................ 49
Custom Logo ................................................................................................................. 49
Protected Setup Pages ........................................................................................... 50
Protected Setup Navigation Buttons............................................................................. 52
Security Settings ........................................................................................................... 53
System Settings Page.................................................................................................... 54
Wireless Settings Page .................................................................................................. 56
Wireless Settings ........................................................................................................... 61
Open Settings ............................................................................................................... 61
WEP Settings................................................................................................................. 62
WPA-PSK Settings ......................................................................................................... 63
EAP-LEAP Settings ........................................................................................................ 64
EAP-FAST Settings ........................................................................................................ 65
EAP-PEAP Settings ........................................................................................................ 67
EAP-TTLS Settings ......................................................................................................... 68
ii
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Table of Contents
EAP-TLS Settings ........................................................................................................... 70
Client certificate configuration ...................................................................................... 71
Calibration Page............................................................................................................ 72
G4 Web Control Settings/G4 Web Control Page .......................................................... 73
Other Settings............................................................................................................... 74
Cache Settings/Cache Setup Page ................................................................................ 75
Setting the image cache................................................................................................ 77
Clearing the image cache .............................................................................................. 77
Checking image cache status ........................................................................................ 77
Password Setup Page.................................................................................................... 77
SIP Settings Page (MVP-8400 only) ............................................................................... 78
Tools.............................................................................................................................. 79
Panel Connection Logs/Panel Logs Page....................................................................... 80
Checking the Panel Connection Logs ............................................................................ 81
Refreshing the Panel Connections Log .......................................................................... 81
Clearing the Panel Connections Log.............................................................................. 81
Panel Statistics Page ..................................................................................................... 81
Checking the Panel Statistics......................................................................................... 83
Refreshing the Panel Statistics ...................................................................................... 83
Clearing the Panel Statistics .......................................................................................... 83
Connection Utility Page................................................................................................. 83
Using the Connection Utility.......................................................................................... 85
Information ............................................................................................................. 85
Project Information Page............................................................................................... 85
Panel Information Page ................................................................................................. 87
Time & Date Setup ................................................................................................. 89
Audio Settings ........................................................................................................ 91
WAV files - Supported sample rates.............................................................................. 92
Custom Sounds.............................................................................................................. 92
Battery Settings/Batteries ...................................................................................... 92
EAP Security & Server Certificates - Overview ....................................................... 94
Programming ....................................................................................................97
Overview ................................................................................................................ 97
Button Assignments ............................................................................................... 97
Page Commands ..................................................................................................... 97
@APG .....................................................................................................................................
@CPG .....................................................................................................................................
@DPG .....................................................................................................................................
@PDR .....................................................................................................................................
@PHE......................................................................................................................................
@PHP......................................................................................................................................
@PHT......................................................................................................................................
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
97
97
98
98
98
98
98
iii
Table of Contents
@PPA...................................................................................................................................... 99
@PPF ...................................................................................................................................... 99
@PPG ..................................................................................................................................... 99
@PPK...................................................................................................................................... 99
@PPM ................................................................................................................................... 100
@PPN ................................................................................................................................... 100
@PPT .................................................................................................................................... 100
@PPX.................................................................................................................................... 100
@PSE .................................................................................................................................... 100
@PSP .................................................................................................................................... 101
@PST .................................................................................................................................... 101
PAGE.................................................................................................................................... 101
PPOF .................................................................................................................................... 101
Programming Numbers......................................................................................... 102
RGB triplets and names for basic 88 colors ................................................................ 102
PPOG ................................................................................................................................... 102
PPON ................................................................................................................................... 102
Font styles and ID numbers ......................................................................................... 105
Border styles and Programming numbers ................................................................... 105
"^" Button Commands ......................................................................................... 108
^ANI.....................................................................................................................................
^APF ....................................................................................................................................
^BAT ....................................................................................................................................
^BAU....................................................................................................................................
^BCB ....................................................................................................................................
^BCF ....................................................................................................................................
^BCT ....................................................................................................................................
^BDO ...................................................................................................................................
^BFB ....................................................................................................................................
^BIM ....................................................................................................................................
^BLN ....................................................................................................................................
^BMC ...................................................................................................................................
^BMF ...................................................................................................................................
^BMI ....................................................................................................................................
^BML....................................................................................................................................
^BMP ...................................................................................................................................
^BNC ...................................................................................................................................
^BNN ...................................................................................................................................
^BNT....................................................................................................................................
^BOP....................................................................................................................................
^BOR....................................................................................................................................
^BOS....................................................................................................................................
^BPP ....................................................................................................................................
^BRD....................................................................................................................................
^BSF.....................................................................................................................................
^BSM ...................................................................................................................................
^BSO....................................................................................................................................
^BVL ....................................................................................................................................
^BVN....................................................................................................................................
^BVP ....................................................................................................................................
^BVT ....................................................................................................................................
^BWW..................................................................................................................................
iv
108
108
108
109
109
109
110
110
110
111
111
112
113
115
115
115
116
116
116
116
117
117
117
117
118
118
118
118
118
119
119
119
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Table of Contents
^CPF ....................................................................................................................................
^DLD....................................................................................................................................
^DPF ....................................................................................................................................
^ENA ...................................................................................................................................
^FON ...................................................................................................................................
^GDI.....................................................................................................................................
^GIV.....................................................................................................................................
^GLH....................................................................................................................................
^GLL.....................................................................................................................................
^GRD ...................................................................................................................................
^GRU ...................................................................................................................................
^GSC....................................................................................................................................
^GSN ...................................................................................................................................
^ICO.....................................................................................................................................
^IRM ....................................................................................................................................
^JSB.....................................................................................................................................
^JSI ......................................................................................................................................
^JST .....................................................................................................................................
^MBT ...................................................................................................................................
^MDC...................................................................................................................................
^SAV ....................................................................................................................................
^SHO ...................................................................................................................................
^SKT ....................................................................................................................................
^STO ....................................................................................................................................
^TEC ....................................................................................................................................
^TEF.....................................................................................................................................
^TOP ....................................................................................................................................
119
119
120
120
120
121
121
121
121
121
122
122
122
122
123
123
123
124
124
124
124
124
125
125
125
125
125
Miscellaneous MVP Strings back to the Master........................................................... 126
undock <master> .................................................................................................................
dock .....................................................................................................................................
^TXT ....................................................................................................................................
^UNI.....................................................................................................................................
^VTP ....................................................................................................................................
126
126
126
126
126
MVP Panel Lock Passcode commands ......................................................................... 127
^LPC..................................................................................................................................... 127
^LPR..................................................................................................................................... 127
^LPS ..................................................................................................................................... 127
Text Effects Names ............................................................................................... 128
Button Query Commands ..................................................................................... 129
?BCB ....................................................................................................................................
?BCF.....................................................................................................................................
?BCT.....................................................................................................................................
?BMP....................................................................................................................................
?BOP ....................................................................................................................................
?BRD ....................................................................................................................................
?BRT .....................................................................................................................................
?BWW ..................................................................................................................................
?CHR ....................................................................................................................................
?FBC.....................................................................................................................................
?FON....................................................................................................................................
?ICO .....................................................................................................................................
?JSB .....................................................................................................................................
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
130
130
131
131
132
132
132
133
133
133
134
134
135
v
Table of Contents
?JSI.......................................................................................................................................
?JST......................................................................................................................................
?LOG ....................................................................................................................................
?MCO ...................................................................................................................................
?MUT....................................................................................................................................
?PIF ......................................................................................................................................
?STA.....................................................................................................................................
?STO ....................................................................................................................................
?TEC.....................................................................................................................................
?TEF .....................................................................................................................................
?TXT .....................................................................................................................................
135
136
136
136
136
136
137
137
137
138
138
Panel Runtime Operations .................................................................................... 139
ABEEP ..................................................................................................................................
ADBEEP................................................................................................................................
@AKB ...................................................................................................................................
AKEYB..................................................................................................................................
AKEYP ..................................................................................................................................
AKEYR..................................................................................................................................
?WIF .....................................................................................................................................
@AKP ...................................................................................................................................
@AKR ...................................................................................................................................
BEEP.....................................................................................................................................
BRIT......................................................................................................................................
@BRT ....................................................................................................................................
DBEEP ..................................................................................................................................
@EKP....................................................................................................................................
PKEYP ..................................................................................................................................
@PKP....................................................................................................................................
SETUP ..................................................................................................................................
SHUTDOWN.........................................................................................................................
SLEEP ...................................................................................................................................
@SOU ...................................................................................................................................
@TKP ....................................................................................................................................
TPAGEON ............................................................................................................................
TPAGEOFF ...........................................................................................................................
@VKB ...................................................................................................................................
WAKE...................................................................................................................................
139
139
139
139
139
139
139
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
141
141
141
141
141
141
142
142
142
142
142
Input Commands................................................................................................... 143
^CAL .................................................................................................................................... 143
^KPS .................................................................................................................................... 143
^VKS .................................................................................................................................... 143
Embedded codes .................................................................................................. 144
Panel Setup Commands ........................................................................................ 145
^MUT ...................................................................................................................................
@PWD ..................................................................................................................................
^PWD...................................................................................................................................
^VOL ....................................................................................................................................
145
145
145
145
Dynamic Image Commands................................................................................... 146
^BBR .................................................................................................................................... 146
^RAF .................................................................................................................................... 146
^RFR .................................................................................................................................... 146
vi
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Table of Contents
^RAF, ^RMF - Embedded Codes ................................................................................ 147
^RMF ................................................................................................................................... 147
^RSR .................................................................................................................................... 147
Escape Sequences ....................................................................................................... 148
$DV ......................................................................................................................................
$SY .......................................................................................................................................
$IP ........................................................................................................................................
$HN......................................................................................................................................
$MC .....................................................................................................................................
$ID .......................................................................................................................................
$PX.......................................................................................................................................
$PY.......................................................................................................................................
$ST .......................................................................................................................................
$AC ......................................................................................................................................
$AP ......................................................................................................................................
$CC ......................................................................................................................................
$CP.......................................................................................................................................
$LC .......................................................................................................................................
$LP .......................................................................................................................................
$BX ......................................................................................................................................
$BY.......................................................................................................................................
$BN ......................................................................................................................................
148
148
148
148
148
148
148
148
148
148
148
148
148
148
148
148
148
148
Intercom Commands ............................................................................................. 149
^MODEL?............................................................................................................................. 149
^ICS- .................................................................................................................................... 149
^ICE' .................................................................................................................................... 149
SIP Commands ...................................................................................................... 150
^PHN-AUTOANSWER ..........................................................................................................
^PHN-CALL ..........................................................................................................................
^PHN-INCOMING ................................................................................................................
^ICM-TALK...........................................................................................................................
^ICM-LISTEN ........................................................................................................................
^ICM-MUTEMIC ...................................................................................................................
^PHN-ANSWER....................................................................................................................
^PHN-LINESTATE.................................................................................................................
^PHN-MSGWAITING............................................................................................................
^PHN-PRIVACY ....................................................................................................................
^PHN-REDIAL ......................................................................................................................
^PHN-TRANSFERRED ..........................................................................................................
^PHN-AUTOANSWER ..........................................................................................................
?PHN-AUTOANSWER...........................................................................................................
^PHN-CALL ..........................................................................................................................
^PHN-DTMF.........................................................................................................................
^PHN-HANGUP....................................................................................................................
^PHN-HOLD.........................................................................................................................
?PHN-LINESTATE .................................................................................................................
^PHN-PRIVACY ....................................................................................................................
^PHN-SETUP-DOMAIN ........................................................................................................
^PHN-SETUP-ENABLE..........................................................................................................
^PHN-SETUP-PASSWORD....................................................................................................
^PHN-SETUP-PORT ..............................................................................................................
^PHN-SETUP-PROXYADDR..................................................................................................
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
150
150
150
150
150
150
151
151
151
151
151
151
152
152
152
152
152
152
152
152
153
153
153
153
153
vii
Table of Contents
?PHN-PRIVACY.....................................................................................................................
^PHN-REDIAL ......................................................................................................................
^PHN-TRANSFER .................................................................................................................
^PHN-SETUP-STUNADDR ....................................................................................................
^PHN-SETUP-USERNAME ....................................................................................................
153
153
153
154
154
Panel Calibration ............................................................................................155
Calibrating the MVP Panels .................................................................................. 155
Testing your Calibration .............................................................................................. 156
If Calibration Is Not Working....................................................................................... 156
Appendix A: Text Formatting .........................................................................157
Text Formatting Codes for Bargraphs/Joysticks................................................... 157
Text Area Input Masking....................................................................................... 158
Input mask character types ......................................................................................... 158
Input Mask Ranges ...................................................................................................... 159
Input mask next field characters.................................................................................. 159
Input mask operations................................................................................................. 159
Input mask literals ....................................................................................................... 159
Input mask output examples ....................................................................................... 160
URL Resources ...................................................................................................... 160
Special Escape Sequences ........................................................................................... 160
Appendix B - Wireless Technology .................................................................163
Overview of Wireless Technology......................................................................... 163
Terminology.......................................................................................................... 164
802.1x ......................................................................................................................... 164
AES.............................................................................................................................. 164
CERTIFICATES (CA) ..................................................................................................... 164
MIC.............................................................................................................................. 164
WEP............................................................................................................................. 164
WPA ............................................................................................................................ 164
WPA2 .......................................................................................................................... 165
EAP Authentication............................................................................................... 166
EAP Characteristics ..................................................................................................... 166
EAP Communication Overview.................................................................................... 167
Configuring Modero Firmware via the USB Port .................................................. 167
Step 1: Configure The Panel For a USB Connection Type ........................................... 167
Step 2: Prepare NetLinx Studio For Communication Via the USB Port ....................... 168
AMX Certificate Upload Utility ............................................................................. 168
Uploading a Certificate File .................................................................................. 169
Appendix C: Troubleshooting .........................................................................171
Overview .............................................................................................................. 171
Panel Doesn’t Respond To Touches ............................................................................ 171
viii
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Table of Contents
Battery Will Not Hold Or Take A Charge .................................................................... 171
Panel Isn’t Appearing In The Online Tree Tab ............................................................. 171
MVP Can’t Obtain a DHCP Address ............................................................................ 172
My WEP Doesn’t Seem To Be Working ....................................................................... 172
NetLinx Studio Only Detects One Of My Connected Masters..................................... 172
Can’t Connect To a NetLinx Master ............................................................................ 172
Only One Modero Panel In My System Shows Up ....................................................... 172
Panel Behaves Strangely After Downloading A Panel File Or Firmware ..................... 172
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
ix
Table of Contents
x
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
MVP Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
MVP Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Overview
The MVP-7500 (7.5") and MVP-8400 (8.4") Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels (FIG. 1) are 802.11-based
wireless handheld G4 touch panels, pre-installed with an 802.11 Wi-Fi Interface Card to communicate with a NetLinx
Master via a standard 802.11b/g Wireless Access Point.
MVP-7500
(FG5965-01)
MVP-8400
(FG5965-02)
FIG. 1 MVP-7500 and MVP-8400 Touch Panels
Previous 802.11b versions of MVP panels are field upgradeable to 802.11g communication via the
installation of the NXA-WC8011GCF Wi-Fi Card Kit (FG2255-07).
MVP panels feature nine programmable external pushbuttons and two programmable LEDs, and support
AMX G4 graphics technology, making them compatible with AMX’s TPDesign4 Touch Panel Design
program.
MVP panels utilize two IR frequencies (38 KHz and 455 KHz) as well as 2 additional user-defined IR
libraries, on 4 IR ports.
MVP panels feature programmable firmware that can be upgraded via either the wireless interface card or the
mini-USB port. MVP panels utilize unique firmware kit files: the MVP-7500 can be upgraded via the "596501.kit" file, while the MVP-8400 can be upgraded via the "5965-02.kit" file.
MVP panels support AMX Computer Control, which enables remote viewing and control of any networked
computer directly from the panel. This gives the user the ability to launch digital music from a PC, cruise the
Internet, check and respond to E-mail, open software files, and launch applications.
MVP panels come equipped with a battery and power supply (see specifications).
Optional AMX accessory solutions for the MVPs include
MVP-TDS Table Top Docking Station (see the MVP-TDS Table Top Docking Station Operation/Reference
Guide for details).
MVP-WDS Wall/Flush Mount Docking Station-Black/Silver (see the MVP-WDS Wall Docking Station
Operation/Reference Guide for details).
MVP-KS Kickstand (see the MVP-KS Kickstand Operation/Reference Guide for details).
MVP Specifications
The MVP-7500 (FG5965-01) utilizes a 7.5" Color Passive LCD to display a 640 x 480 pixel image with 4096
colors.
The MVP-8400 panel (FG5965-02) utilizes an 8.4" Color Active LCD to display an 800 x 600 pixel
resolution using 256K colors.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
1
MVP Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Mini-USB connector
programmable
Stylus LED
programmable
status LED
programmable
pushbuttons
programmable
pushbuttons
(joystick
configuration)
Stylus
(fits within slot
on side panel)
Microphone
MVP-8400 only
Speaker (right)
MVP-8400 only
PWR connector
Docking station interface connector
FIG. 2 MVP Touch Panels
MVP Specifications
Models:
• MVP-7500
• MVP-8400
Dimensions (HWD):
• 7.09" x 10.47" x 1.47" (18.00 cm x 26.60 cm x 3.73 cm)
Power Requirements:
Without Charging:
MVP-7500:
• Constant current draw: 1.0 A @ 12 VDC
• Startup current draw: 1.5 A @ 12 VDC
MVP-8400:
• Constant current draw: 1.2 A @ 12 VDC
• Startup current draw: 1.8 A @ 12 VDC
While Charging:
MVP-7500:
• Constant current draw: 3.0 A @ 12 VDC
• Startup current draw: 3.6 A @ 12 VDC
MVP-8400:
• Constant current draw: 3.2 A @ 12 VDC
• Startup current draw: 3.8 A @ 12 VDC
• If MVP panel is mounted onto a TDS or WDS, add 0.1 A to the above
figures.
Power Modes:
• ON: Panel is fully functional.
• STANDBY: Panel uses low power, the LCD/backlight is shutdown, LEDs still
function. Panel resumes the ON mode in ~ 1 second.
• OFF: On-board programs not running, touch screen still powered, LED not
functional. Panel resumes the ON mode in ~ 30 seconds.
Battery Duration:
(per battery)
• Four hours of normal use (25% On state, 25% Standby, and 50% Off).
Memory (factory default):
• 64 MB SDRAM
• Two hours of continuous use.
• 64 MB Compact Flash (upgradeable to 1 GB - factory programmed)
Weight:
1.85 lbs (0.84 kg)
• with 1 battery: 2.25 lbs (1.02 kg)
• with 2 batteries: 2.65 lbs (1.20 kg)
2
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
MVP Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
MVP Specifications (Cont.)
MVP-7500 LCD
Specifications:
• Aspect ratio: 4 x 3
• Brightness (luminance): 120 cd/m2
• Channel transparency: 8-bit Alpha blending
• Contrast ratio: 20:1
• Display colors: 4096 colors (12-bit color depth)
• Dot/pixel pitch: 0.23 mm
• Panel type: TFT Color Passive-Matrix
• Screen resolution: 640 x 480 pixels (HV) @ 60 Hz frame frequency
• Viewing angles (vertical): + 17° / - 17° (from center)
MVP-8400 LCD
Specifications:
• Aspect ratio: 4 x 3
• Brightness (luminance): 180 cd/m2
• Channel transparency: 8-bit Alpha blending
• Contrast ratio: 350:1
• Display colors: 256K colors (18-bit color depth)
• Dot/pixel pitch: 0.21 mm
• Panel type: TFT Color Active-Matrix
• Screen resolution: 800 x 600 pixels (HV) @ 60 Hz frame frequency
• Viewing angles (vertical): + 60° / - 40° (from center)
Active Screen Area:
• 6.71" x 5.03" (17.04cm x 12.78cm)
External Components:
Docking station interface
connector:
Metallic strip connector located on the bottom panel provides communication
and power between the panel and the optional docking stations.
LEDs:
Two sets of NetLinx programmable LEDs (supporting On, Off, and Blink).
Default blink patterns:
- Stylus LED: Blink = Batteries charging, On = Batteries charged.
- Front panel LED: Blink = Panel booting, On = Panel operating properly.
Mini-USB connector:
5-pin mini-USB connector for programming, firmware update, and file transfer.
Power connector:
• 2.1mm barrel-style power jack, for use with the included PS4.4 power
supply.
Stylus slot:
• Illuminated slot where the included stylus is stored, located on the left side of
the MVP.
External Buttons:
• Nine programmable pushbuttons (four located on the left of the LCD and five
located on the right in a joystick configuration).
Internal Components:
Wireless Interface card:
Provides 802.11 (CF Type I) wireless connectivity between the panel and a
Wireless Access Point (such as the NXA-WAP200G).
IR Emitters:
Transmit IR over 20 feet (6.10 m).
Internal buzzer:
Emits a Piezo electric tone (MVP-7500 only).
Internal speakers:
One speaker for stereo output (MVP-8400 only).
Internal microphone
For use with the intercom feature (MVP-8400 only).
Battery compartment:
Houses up to 2 MVP-BP Power Packs.
Button Assignments:
Button assignments can only be adjusted in TPD4 and not on the panels.
• Button channel range: 1 - 4000 button push and feedback (per address port)
• Button variable text range: 1 - 4000 (per address port)
• Button states range: 1 - 256 (General Button; 1 = Off State, 2 = On State)
• Level range: 1 - 600 (default level value 0-255, can be set up to 1-65535)
• Address port range: 1 - 100
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
3
MVP Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
MVP Specifications (Cont.)
Operating / Storage
Environment:
• Operating Temperature: 0° C (32° F) to 40° C (104° F)
• Operating Humidity: 20% - 85% RH
• Storage Temperature: -20° C (-4° F) to 60° C (140° F)
• Storage Humidity: 5% - 85% RH
Certifications:
• FCC Part 15 Class B and CE
Included Accessories:
• MVP-BP Power Pack (FG5965-20): 1 with MVP-7500, 2 with MVP-8400
• 80211xCF Wireless Interface Compact Flash card (Type 1) - pre-installed
• PS4.4 Power Supply (FG423-44)
• Stylus
Other AMX Equipment:
• CB-MVPWDS Conduit Box (FG037-10)
• CC-USB (Type A) to Mini-B 5-Wire programming cable (FG10-5965)
• MVP-BP Power Pack (additional/spare) (FG5965-20)
• MVP-KS Kickstand (FG5965-12)
• MVP-STYLUS three pack (FG5965-30)
• MVP-TDS Table Top Docking Station (FG5965-10)
• MVP-WDS Wall/Flush Mount Docking Station:
Black (FG5965-11) / Silver (FG5965-21)
• MVP-WDS-SK Silver Conversion Kit for MVP-WDS (FG5965-22)
• NXA-WC80211GCF 802.11g Wireless Compact Flash Card Upgrade Kit
(FG2255-07)
• Upgrade Compact Flash (factory programmed with firmware):
MVP-7500:
NXA-75CF128M - 128 MB compact flash card (FG2116-55)
NXA-75CF256M - 256 MB compact flash card (FG2116-56)
NXA-75CF512M - 512 MB compact flash card (FG2116-57)
NXA-75CF1GB - 1 GB compact flash card (FG2116-58)
MVP-8400:
NXA-84CF128M - 128 MB compact flash card (FG2116-50)
NXA-84CF256M - 256 MB compact flash card (FG2116-51)
NXA-84CF512M - 512 MB compact flash card (FG2116-52)
NXA-84CF1GB - 1 GB compact flash card (FG2116-53)
4
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
MVP-BP Power Pack
MVP-BP Power Pack
Overview
The MVP-BP Power Pack (FG5965-20) is a rechargeable Lithium-Ion battery used to provide power to the MVP touch
panels.
One MVP-BP is included with each MVP-7500 touch panel.
Two MVP-BPs are included with each MVP-8400 touch panel.
FIG. 3 MVP-BP Power Pack
MVP-BPs can be charged with either a Table Top Docking Station (MVP-TDS), Wall/Flush Mount Docking Station
(MVP-WDS), or MVP panel itself. Extra MVP-BP Power Packs can be purchased separately.
MVP-BP Specifications
MVP-BP Specifications
Dimensions (HWD):
0.48" x 1.52" x 8.65" (1.23 cm x 3.86 cm x 21.97 cm)
Power (Voltage):
7.2 Volts (nominal)
Weight:
0.40 lbs (0.18 kg)
Charge Capacity:
3600mAh
Operating/Storage Environments: • Operating Temperature: 0° C (32° F) to 40° C (104° F)
• Operating Humidity: 20% - 85% RH
• Storage Temperature: -20° C (-4° F) to 60° C (140° F)
• Storage Humidity: 5% - 85% RH
Installing MVP-BP Batteries
1. Disconnect any cables, and place the MVP face down to expose the battery compartment.
2. Press down on the traction grooves to slide the battery compartment cover (away from the metal plate), to open the
battery compartment.
3. Insert the MVP-BP(s) so that the connector makes contact with the battery pins at the end of the battery slot as
shown in FIG. 4.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
5
MVP-BP Power Pack
Battery Compartment Cover
Battery connector
Battery pins
Alignment Guide hole openings
Traction Grooves
Battery
Removal
Straps
Battery slot 2
Battery slot 1
FIG. 4 Installing MVP-BP batteries into the MVP battery slots
If you are only using one battery, use Battery Slot #1.
4. To replace the battery compartment cover, use the alignment guide holes to align the cover with the edges of the
battery compartment, and slide it back into place until it snaps shut.
6
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
NXA-CFSP Compact Flash
NXA-CFSP Compact Flash
Overview
Every MVP panel is shipped with a 64 MB Compact Flash card.
Compact Flash Card - Security
All security user names and passwords (for the docking station) are stored in the Compact Flash card. After installing the
Compact Flash card upgrade, all security user names and passwords need to be re-entered to enable security. For this
reason, it is recommended that you upgrade the card prior to setting up the security information for the docking station.
The NXA-CFSP Compact Flash card is factory programmed with panel firmware and can be upgraded up to 1GB:
Optional Compact Flash Upgrades
• NXA-CFSP128M - 128 MB Compact Flash
card
(FG2116-36)
• NXA-CFSP256M - 256 MB Compact Flash
card
(FG2116-37)
• NXA-CFSP512M - 512 MB Compact Flash
card
(FG2116-38)
• NXA-CFSP1G - 1 GB Compact Flash card
(FG2116-39)
Installing the NXA-CFSP Compact Flash Card
Batteries should be removed prior to upgrading the Compact Flash card.
Accessing the MVP’s Internal Components
1. Remove all connectors, remove power and remove batteries.
2. Remove the two housing screws (FIG. 5).
3. Grasp the bottom rim of the rear housing just above the MVP interface connector, and carefully pull the bottom rim
away from the IR Emitter and up, to expose the internal components.
4. Remove the trim from the top rim of the circuit board (FIG. 5).
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
7
NXA-CFSP Compact Flash
Battery Compartment cover
Housing screws
B
Rear outer housing
Bottom rim of outer
housing
Trim fits inside
the grooves around
the edges of the panel
A
Circuit board
housing
attachment
locations (4)
Panel
FIG. 5 Removing the MVP enclosure (housing)
Removing the Installed Card
1. Discharge any static electricity from your body by touching a grounded metal object and then locate the card slot on
the main circuit board (FIG. 6).
2. Place the circuit board on a flat level surface so that the IR Emitters are pointing away from you (FIG. 6).
3. Insert the tip of a grounded flat-head screwdriver into one of the card removal grooves (located on either side of the
existing card), and gently pry it out of the slot (FIG. 7). Repeat this process on the opposite card removal groove.
This alternating action causes the card to "wiggle" away from the on-board connector pins.
4. Slip your finger into the gap between the card and the circuit board and firmly grab the card by its sides, then
carefully pull it up and out of the slot. An angular removal of the card is required because one of the housing’s latch
attachments blocks the slot opening.
use care when pulling up on the card.
Installing the Compact Flash Upgrade Card
1. Discharge any static electricity from your body by touching a grounded metal object and then locate the memory
card slot on the main board (A in FIG. 6).
8
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
NXA-CFSP Compact Flash
Internal circuit board
(top view - detail)
Card removal grooves
IR Emitters
Compact Flash
card
A
B
Wireless Interface
card
FIG. 6 Location and orientation of the Compact Flash cards (both MVP panels)
2. Place the circuit board on a flat level surface so that the IR Emitters are pointing away from you (FIG. 6).
3. Insert the tip of a grounded flat-head screwdriver into one of the card removal grooves (located on either side of the
existing Compact Flash card), and gently pry it out of the slot (FIG. 7). Repeat this process on the opposite card
removal groove. This alternating action causes the pre-existing card to "wiggle" away from the on-board connector
pins.
4. Slip your finger into the opening (between the connector pins and the card resulting from step 3) and push the card
out.
5. Finish the process by firmly gripping the exposed sides of the card and pulling it out (FIG. 7). USE CARE WHEN
HANDLING THE CARD.
Card removal
grooves
On-board Compact
Flash connector (with pins)
Insert with arrow
facing towards the pins
Connector opening
FIG. 7 Removing/installing a Compact Flash Memory card
6. Insert the new card firmly into the slot opening connector (FIG. 7) until the contact pins are completely inside the
card and securely attached to the pin sockets.
Any new Compact Flash card upgrade is detected by the panel only after the unit
cycles power.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
9
NXA-CFSP Compact Flash
10
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Wireless Interface Cards
Wireless Interface Cards
802.11b Wireless Interface Card
MVP panels can connect to a wireless network using the 802.11b Wireless Interface Card (70-5965-02), pre-installed in
MVP touch panel models. The 802.11b Wireless Interface Card is a 2.4 GHz Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS)
802.11b 11M wireless PC card, with detachable antenna.
FIG. 8 802.11b Wireless Interface Card
The wireless interface card works with 802.11b/g Wireless Access Points, such as the NXA-WAP200G.
The NXA-WAP200G uses a default SSID of AMX.
Follow your particular WAP’s instruction manual for setup procedures.
Specifications
802.11b Wireless Interface Card Specifications
Dimensions (HWD):
• 2.07" x 1.68" x 0.21" (52.56 mm x 42.80 mm x 5.57 mm)
Weight:
• 13.61 grams (0.030 lbs)
Features:
• Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) 64-bit and 128-bit data encryption
• Diversity Antenna Connectors automatically select the best available signal
• Supports infrastructure (communications to wired networks via Access Points),
and roaming (standard IEEE 802.11b compliant)
Antenna:
• 2, Ceramic (Diversity Supported)
Host Interface:
• Compact Flash Type I
Interoperability:
• Interoperable with Wi-Fi (WECA) certified products
LED Indicators:
• Power / Link activity
Modulation:
• DSSS, DBSK, DQSK, CCK
Network Standard:
• IEEE 802.11b
Number of Channels:
• 14
Operating Voltage:
• 5 / 3.3 V
Operating Channels:
• 11 Channels (USA, Canada)
• 13 Channels (Europe)
• 14 Channels (Japan)
• 4 Channels (France)
Operating Environment:
• Temperature: 0°C ~ 70°C (non-operating) and -15 ~ 80°C (storage)
• Humidity (non-condensing): 5% ~ 95% RH
Power Consumption:
• TX power consumption: < 265 mA
• RX power consumption: < 165 mA
• Sleep Mode: 2 mA - 15 mA
Radio Data Rate:
• 1Mbps, 2Mbps, 5.5Mbps, 11Mbps, Auto Rate
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
11
Wireless Interface Cards
802.11b Wireless Interface Card Specifications (Cont.)
Receive Sensitivity:
• @PER < 8%
11 Mbps: -83 dBm (max)
5.5 Mbps: -86 dBm (max)
2 Mbps: -89 dBm (max)
1 Mbps: -92 dBm (max)
RF Output Power:
• 15 dBm +/- 1 dBm
• Channels 1 - 11 (North America)
Security:
• WEP 64,128 bit, WPA/TKIP
Wireless Restrictions:
• In R&TTE countries, such as France, the 802.11g frequency band is restricted
to 2454 - 2483.5 MHz (2.4 - 2.4835 GHz) and a max power output of
100 mW EIRP outdoor.
Certifications:
• FCC (United States)
• IC (Canada)
• CE (Europe)
• TELEC (Japan)
The only time the wireless card should be removed is in case of failure or when
upgrading to the 802.11g Wi-Fi card.
NXA-WC80211GCF 802.11g Wireless Interface Card
Optionally, MVP panels can be upgraded with the field-installable 802.11g Wi-Fi card (FG2255-07), purchased
separately as a Wi-Fi Upgrade Kit.
PIFA antenna
FIG. 9 NXA-WC80211GCF 802.11g wireless card
The NXA-WC80211GCF is a 2.4 GHz Wi-Fi LAN CF Card which upgrades a Modero panel’s RF capabilities from
802.11b to 802.11g. This card provides enhanced range and throughput, wireless encryption and data security (WPA and
WPA2 and WEP) in Compact Flash Type I form factor.
The NXA-WC80211GCF incorporates DSSS and OFDM radio technology and operates at ISM frequency bands of 2.4
GHz, while providing data transfer speeds of up to 54Mbps.
Other features include:
Support for IEEE 802.11b and 802.11g
Supports Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) at 128-bit.
Supports authentication methods such as: EAP-FAST, EAP-LEAP, EAP-PEAP, EAP-TLS, and EAP-TTLS
Supports Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) 64-bit and 128-bit data encryption (known to the on-board
firmware as Static WEP)
The NXA-WC80211GCF is backwards compatible with 802.11b networks.
12
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Wireless Interface Cards
To fully utilize wireless security features, this card must be used in tandem with the
latest Modero firmware upgrade available at www.amx.com.
This upgrade kit requires that pre-existing panels first be removed from their current location (tabletop or wall docking
station) before an installer can access the internal circuit boards and upgrade a pre-existing 802.11b wireless CF card.
MVP panels require the use of a cardboard cutout (Mounting Template) to properly position the metal antenna plate onto
the inner surface of the unit’s rear plastic housing. The procedures for upgrading a CF card on an MVP is identical for
both MVP-7500 and MVP-8400 panels.
Specifications
NXA-WC80211GCF Specifications
Dimensions (HWD):
• 0.22" x 1.68" x 2.40" (5.6 mm x 42.80 mm x 61.0 mm)
Weight:
• 19.50 grams (0.043 lbs)
Description:
• Wireless LAN Compact Flash Card with external PIFA antenna.
• Features enterprise-class security such as WPA and WPA2 security.
Antenna Type:
• External PIFA antenna (factory-installed)
Bus Interface:
• Compact Flash Type I
Certifications:
• FCC Part 15 Class B, CE, IC, TELEC, and Wi-Fi
Media Access Control
Techniques:
• Using 802.11b DSSS communication:
DBPSK @ 1 Mbps
DQPSK @ 2 Mbps
CCK @ 5.5 Mbps
• Using 802.11g OFDM communication:
BPSK @ 6 and 9 Mbps
QPSK @ 12 and 18 Mbps
16-QAM @ 24 and 36 Mbps
64-QAM @ 48 and 54 Mbps
Network Architecture:
• Infrastructure mode (Client-to-Access Point)
Operating Channels:
• Using 802.11b & g communication:
- 04: (Ch 10 - 13) - France
- 11: (Ch 1 - 11) - North America
- 13: (Ch 1 - 13) - Europe ETSI
- 13: (Ch 1 - 13) - Japan (802.11g)
- 14: (Ch 1 - 14) - Japan (802.11b)
Note: To alter the card’s default country code (North America), contact an AMX
Technical Support representative for detailed procedures and information.
Operating Environment:
• Temperature: 0°C ~ 45°C (32°F to 113°F) (operating) and
-20°C ~ 70°C (-4°F to 158°F) (storage)
• Humidity: (non-condensing) 5% ~ 90% RH (operating) and
(non-condensing) 5% ~ 95% RH (storage)
Operating Voltage:
• 3.3V + 5% I/O supply voltage
Power Consumption:
• @ 802.11b communication:
- RX: 270 mA
- TX: 435 mA
- Standby: 240 mA
• @ 802.11g communication:
- RX: 270 mA
- TX: 460 mA
- Standby: 240 mA
Radio Data Rate:
• 802.11g compliant: 1, 2, 5.5, 11 (DSSS/CCK); 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, and 54
(OFDM) Mbps data rates
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
13
Wireless Interface Cards
NXA-WC80211GCF Specifications (Cont.)
Radio Technology:
• Using 802.11b communication: DSSS (Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum)/
CCK (Complementary Code Keying)
• Using 802.11g communication: DSSS/CCK, OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency
Division Multiplexing
Receiver Sensitivity:
• Using 802.11b communication @ FER<8%:
1 Mbps: -94 dBm (max)
2 Mbps: -93 dBm (max)
5.5 Mbps: -92 dBm (max)
11 Mbps: -90 dBm (max)
• Using 802.11g communication @ PER <10%:
6 Mbps: -87 dBm (max)
9 Mbps: -86 dBm (max)
12 Mbps: -86 dBm (max)
18 Mbps: -84 dBm (max)
24 Mbps: -82 dBm (max)
36 Mbps: -78 dBm (max)
48 Mbps: -74 dBm (max)
54 Mbps: -72 dBm (max)
RF Frequency Ranges:
• Using 802.11b & g communication:
Europe ETSI: 2.412 ~ 2.472 GHz
France: 2.457 ~ 2.472 GHz
Japan (802.11b): 2.412 ~ 2.484 GHz
Japan (802.11g): 2.412 ~ 2.472 GHz
North America: 2.412 ~ 2.462 GHz
Standard Conformance:
• IEEE 802.11b
• IEEE 802.11g
• IEEE 802.11e
• IEEE 802.11i
• Wi-Fi (WPA and WPA2)
Transmit Output Power:
• 802.11b communication: 12 +-1 dBm (1, 2, 5.5, 11 Mbps)
• 802.11g communication: 12 +-1 dBm (6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, and 54 Mbps)
Wireless LAN Security:
• EAP-FAST
• EAP-LEAP
• EAP-PEAP
• EAP-TLS
• EAP-TTLS
• WEP 64 & 128
• WPA-PSK
Touch Panel
Compatibility:
• MVP-7500 (FG5965-01)
• MVP-8400 (FG5965-02)
• NXD-CV10 (FG2259-02)
• NXT-CV10 (FG2259-01/03)
• NXD-CV7 (FG2258-02)
• NXT-CV7 (FG2258-01)
Included Accessories:
• Double-sided adhesive tape
• Mounting Template cutout (62-2255-04)
• NXA-WC80211GCF Quick Start Guide
• Two Alcohol cleaning pads
• Wireless CF card with wireless antenna
14
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Wireless Interface Cards
Installing the 802.11g Card and Antenna
Upgrading the cards on an MVP involves opening the panel enclosure, removing the existing card, replacing it with the
upgrade, and then closing the panel enclosure, as described below.
Firmware Requirements
The NXA-WC80211GCF requires panel firmware versions 5965-01(MVP-7500), and 5965-02 (MVP-8400). This
firmware supports backwards compatibility with 802.11b cards, and security protocols for the NXA-WC80211GCF.
Before installing the NXA-WC80211GCF, upload the latest panel-specific kit file to your MVP (5965-01.kit for the
MVP-7500 and 5965-02.kit for the MVP-8400).
Access the MVP’s Internal Components
Refer to the Accessing the MVP’s Internal Components section on page 7 for details.
Removing the Installed Card
Refer to the Removing the Installed Card section on page 8 for details.
Preparing the MVP’s Rear Housing
1. Flip over the MVP’s rear housing so that the internal support structures are visible, and lay it directly in front of the
circuit board such that the battery compartment is furthest away from you. This placement provides contact of both
top rims (FIG. 10).
2. Use an alcohol pad (included) to clean both the rear housing’s inner surface (bottom right corner) and the underside
of the terminal antenna’s metal plate (FIG. 9). These surfaces must be properly cleaned to provide good adhesion
for the later installation of the antenna.
3. Place the included Mounting Template along the bottom right corner of the rear housing (FIG. 10). Use the
housing’s inner supports to position the template properly.
Mounting Template
clean
this
area
Inner supports
Wireless Card Slot
FIG. 10 Installing the Mounting Template
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
15
Wireless Interface Cards
Installing the NXA-WC80211GCF
1. Grip the sides of the NXA-WC80211GCF and insert it into the slot opening at a downward angle until the contact
pins are securely attached to the pin sockets.
2. Carefully peel off one side of the included double-sided tape and adhere the adhesive side to the surface of the
antenna’s metal plate.
3. Align the double-sided tape to the surface of the terminal antenna’s metal plate, in order to later secure the antenna
within the pre-defined installation area outlined by the included Mounting Template.
4. Locate the T-shaped opening on the left of the cutout and make sure the antenna wire is located along the left side
of the cutout (FIG. 4).
FIG. 11 Adhering the antenna plate to the MVP outer housing
5. Grip the antenna by its sides and carefully peel-off the remaining protective film on the double-sided tape.
6. Align the antenna into the long vertical groove in the cutout and firmly adhere it to the inner surface of the housing.
Make sure the wire is threaded along the left side of the cutout, this helps in the removal of the cutout.
7. With the antenna now securely attached to the MVP’s inner housing, remove the cutout by carefully pulling up on
the cutout and threading the antenna wire through the T-shaped opening.
Closing and Securing the MVP Enclosure
Once the card has been installed, close and re-secure the outer housing:
1. Reinstall the dark grey trim along the top rim of the board (A in FIG. 12).
2. While angling the top rim of the MVP’s rear outer housing (B in FIG. 12) down toward the IR Emitters, insert the
four outer housing latches into their corresponding attachment locations along the top rim of the MVP panel (two
on either side of the IR Emitters).
3. While firmly holding the top rims together, gently press down on the bottom ridge of the outer housing (at the latch
locations) and verify that each housing latch fits within its corresponding attachment location on the board. When
done, complete the insertion of the remaining housing latches.
4. Verify that the notches along the bottom of the plastic battery slot separator strip also fit into the three provided
alignment holes on the circuit board.
5. Firmly press down around the entire rim of the outer housing to snap the cover back into place.
16
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Wireless Interface Cards
Outer housing latches (4)
B
A
4 Outer housing latch
attachment locations
FIG. 12 Outer housing latch attachment locations
Be careful not to pinch the antenna wire in the housing.
6. Use a grounded Phillips-head screwdriver to insert and re-secure the two housing screws removed in Step 1.
7. Insert any available batteries back into the battery compartment.
8. Grab the battery cover and align it over the edges of the battery compartment. Apply downward pressure to the
traction grooves on the Battery Compartment cover and slide it back towards the metal plate to reinstall the cover.
Once the wireless CF card has been installed, be careful not to disconnect or
damage the antenna when subsequentally opening the MVP’s housing.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
17
Wireless Interface Cards
18
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Configuring Communications
Configuring Communications
Communication between the MVP and the Master consists of using either Wireless Ethernet (DHCP, Static IP) or USB.
References to Ethernet in this manual focus on the use of Wireless Ethernet via the MVP’s WiFi Card.
Before commencing, verify you are using the latest NetLinx Master and
Modero panel-specific firmware. Verify you are using the latest versions of AMX’s
NetLinx Studio and TPDesign4 programs.
USB input devices must be plugged into the USB connectors on the docking stations
before the units are powered-up.
Modero Setup and System Settings
AMX Modero panels feature on-board Setup pages. Use the options in the Setup pages to access panel information and
make various configuration changes.
Accessing the Setup and Protected Setup Pages
1. Press down and hold both the bottom, left pushbutton and down on the directional pad simultaneously for 3-5
seconds. This opens the Setup page.
Setup Page Access buttons:
Press and hold simultaneously for
3-5 seconds to access the Setup pages
Press and hold for 6 seconds
to access the Calibration page.
FIG. 13 Setup Page Access buttons
2. Press the Protected Setup button. This invokes a keypad for entry of the password to allow access to the Protected
Setup page. Enter 1988 (the default password), and press Done to proceed.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
19
Configuring Communications
Setting the Panel’s Device Number
In the Protected Setup page:
1. Press the Device Number field to open the Device Number keypad (FIG. 14).
FIG. 14 Protected Setup page
Enter a unique Device Number assignment for the panel, and press Done to return to the Protected Setup page. The
Device Number range is 1 - 32000, the default is 10001.
2. Press Reboot to reboot the panel, and apply the new Device Number.
Wireless Settings Page - Wireless Access Overview
Hot Swapping
Hot swapping is not an issue on these panels as the card is installed within the unit and cannot be removed without first
removing the housing.
In the case of DHCP, there must be a DHCP server accessible before the fields are populated.
If the SSID (Network Name) and WEP fields have not previously been configured, the
Wireless Settings page will not work until the panel is rebooted.
Before selecting Ethernet as the Master Connection Type you must setup the parameters of the wireless card. The
Wireless Access Point communication parameters must match those of the pre-installed wireless CF card inside
the MVP.
The MVP touch panels allow users to connect to a wireless network through their use of the
pre-installed AMX 802.11g wireless interface card to communicate with a Wireless Access Point (WAP) such as the
NXA-WAP200G). The WAP communication parameters must match those of the
pre-installed wireless interface card installed within the panel. This internal card transmits data wirelessly using the
802.11x signals at 2.4 GHz. For a more detailed explanation of the new security and encryption technology, refer to the
section of the document entitled: Appendix B - Wireless Technology section on page 163.
For more information on utilizing the AMX Certificate Upload Utility in conjunction with the EAP security, refer to the
section of the document entitled: Appendix B - Wireless Technology section on page 163.
Configuring a Wireless Network Access
When working with a wireless card, the first step is to configure wireless communication parameters within the Wireless
Settings page. This page only configures the card to communicate to a target WAP (such as the NXA-WAP200G), it is
still necessary to tell the panel which Master it should be communicating with. This "pointing to a Master" is done
via the System Settings page where you configure the IP Address, System Number and Username/Password information
assigned to the target Master.
20
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Configuring Communications
Step 1: Configure the Panel’s Wireless IP Settings
The first step to successfully setting up your internal wireless card is to configure the IP Settings section on the Wireless
Settings page. The section configures the communication parameters from the MVP panel to the web.
Wireless communication using a DHCP Address
In the Protected Setup page:
1. Select Wireless Settings. Wireless communication is set within the IP Settings section of this page (FIG. 15).
2. Toggle the DHCP/Static field (from the IP Settings section) until the choice cycles to DHCP. This action causes all
fields in the IP Settings section (other than Host Name) to be greyed-out.
Do not alter any of these remaining greyed-out fields in the IP Settings section. Once the panel is rebooted, these values
are obtained by the unit and displayed in the DNS fields after power-up.
DHCP will register the unique MAC Address (factory assigned) on the panel and
once the communication setup process is complete, assign IP Address, Subnet
Mask, and Gateway values from the DHCP Server.
3. Press the optional Host Name field to open a Keyboard and enter the Host Name information.
Modero
connection
IP info.
Wireless Access Point
Site Survey Button
FIG. 15 Wireless Settings page (IP Settings section)
4. Press Done after you are finished assigning the alpha-numeric string of the host name.
5. Do not alter any of these remaining greyed-out fields in the IP Settings section. Once the panel is rebooted, these
values are obtained by the unit and displayed in the DNS fields after power-up.
This information can be found in either the Workspace - System name > Define
Device section of your code (that defines the properties for your panel), or in the
Device Addressing/Network Addresses section of the Tools > NetLinx Diagnostics
dialog.
6. Setup the security and communication parameters between the wireless card and the target WAP by configuring the
Wireless Settings section on this page. Refer to Step 2: Configure the Card’s Wireless Security Settings section on
page 23 for detailed procedures to setup either a secure or unsecure connection.
Wireless communication using a Static IP Address
In the Protected Setup page:
1. Press the Wireless Settings button (located on the lower-left) to open the Wireless Settings page. Wireless
communication is set within the IP Settings section of this page (FIG. 15).
Check with your System Administrator for a pre-reserved Static IP Address assigned
to the panel. This address must be obtained before Static assignment of the panel
continues.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
21
Configuring Communications
2. Toggle the DHCP/Static field (from the IP Settings section) until the choice cycles to Static.
The IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway fields then become user-editable (red).
3. Press the IP Address field to open a Keyboard and enter the Static IP Address (provided by your System
Administrator).
4. Press Done after you are finished entering the IP information.
5. Repeat the same process for the Subnet Mask and Gateway fields.
6. Press the optional Host Name field to open the Keyboard and enter the Host Name information.
7. Press Done after you are finished assigning the alpha-numeric string of the host name.
8. Press the Primary DNS field to open a Keyboard, enter the Primary DNS Address (provided by your System
Administrator) and press Done when compete. Repeat this process for the Secondary DNS field.
9. Press the Domain field to open a Keyboard, enter the resolvable domain Address (this is provided by your System
Administrator and equates to a unique Internet name for the panel), and press Done when complete.
10. Setup the security and communication parameters between the wireless card and the target WAP by configuring the
Wireless Settings section on this page. Refer to the following section for detailed procedures to setup either a secure
or unsecure connection.
Using the Site Survey tool
This tool allows a user to "sniff-out" all transmitting Wireless Access Points within the detection range of the internal
NXA-WC80211GCF. Once pressed, the panel displays the Site Survey page which contains categories such as:
Network Name (SSID) - Wireless Access Point names
Channel (RF) - Channel currently being used by the WAP (Wireless Access Point)
Security Type (if detectable - such as WEP, OPEN and UNKNOWN) - security protocol enabled on the
WAP
Signal Strength - None, Poor, Fair, Good, Very Good, and Excellent
MAC Address - Unique identification of the transmitting Access Point
Indicates the currently
active column and the order
in which the data is being sorted (Descending order shown)
Indicates a selected AP
FIG. 16 Site Survey page
In the Protected Setup page:
1. Press the Wireless Settings button (located on the lower-left) to open the Wireless Settings page.
2. Navigate to the Access Point MAC Address section of this page and press the on-screen
Site Survey button. This action launches the Site Survey page which displays a listing of all detected WAPs in the
communication range of the internal card.
The card scans its environment every four seconds and adds any new WAPs found to the list. Every scan cycle
updates the signal strength field.
Access points are tracked by MAC Address.
If the WAP’s SSID is set as a blank, then N/A is displayed within the SSID field.
If the WAP’s SSID is hidden (not broadcast) it will not show up on the site survey screen but it can still be
configured via the SSID field on the specified security mode screen.
22
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Configuring Communications
If a WAP is displayed in the list is not detected for 10 scans in a row it is then removed from the screen. In
this way, a user can walk around a building and see access points come and go as they move in and out of
range.

3. Sort the information provided on this page by pressing on a column name and toggling the direction of the adjacent
arrow.
Up arrow - indicates that the information is being sorted in a Ascending order.
SSID (A to Z), Channel (1 to 14), Security (Unknown to WEP), Signal (None to Excellent). The firmware
considers the following to be the security order from least secure to most secure: Open, WEP, WPA, WPA2,
and Unknown.
Down arrow - indicates that the information is being sorted in a Descending order.
SSID (Z to A), Channel (11 to 6), Security (WEP to Unknown), Signal (Excellent to None)
If the panel detects more than 10 WAPs, the Up/Down arrows at the far right side of
the page become active (blue) and allow the user to scroll through the list of entries.
4. Select a desired Access Point by touching the corresponding row. The up arrow and down arrow will be grayed out
if there are ten or less access points detected. If there are more, then they will be enabled as appropriate so that the
user can scroll through the list.
5. With the desired WAP selected and highlighted, click the Connect button to be directed to the selected security
mode’s Settings page with the SSID field filled in. You can then either Cancel the operation or fill in any necessary
information fields and then click Save.
If you select an Open, WEP, and WPA-PSK Access Point and then click Connect, you will be flipped to the
corresponding Settings page. For any other security mode, if you click Connect you will only return to the previous
page without any information being pre-filled out for you.
In an Open security mode, when a target WAP is selected and the connect to, the SSID name of the selected
WAP is saved for the open security mode.
In a Static WEP security mode, when a WEP Access Point is selected and then connected to, the user is then
redirected back to the Static WEP security screen where the SSID field is already filled out and the user is
only required to enter in the remaining WEP key settings.
A similar process occurs for WPA-PSK access points. For any other case, the firmware switches back to the
previous page and security and connection parameters must be entered in as normal.
Step 2: Configure the Card’s Wireless Security Settings
The second step to successfully setting up your wireless card is to configure the Wireless Settings section of the Wireless
Settings page. This section configures both the communication and security parameters from the internal wireless card to
the WAP. The procedures outlined within the following sections use an 802.11g card to configure a common security
configuration to a target WAP.
Refer to either the G4 Web Control Settings/G4 Web Control Page section on page 73 or the Appendix B - Wireless
Technology section on page 163 for more information on the other security methods.
Once you have set up the wireless card parameters, you must configure the communication parameters for the target
Master; see Step 3: Choose a Master Connection Mode section on page 29.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
23
Configuring Communications
Configuring the Modero’s wireless card for unsecured access to a WAP200G
In the Protected Setup page:
1. Press the Wireless Settings button (located on the lower-left) to open the Wireless Settings page.
MVP
connection
IP info.
Wireless
card security settings
FIG. 17 Wireless Settings page (showing a sample unsecured configuration)
2. Enter the SSID information by either:
Automatically having it filled in by pressing the Site Survey button and from the Site Survey page, choosing
an Open WAP from within the Site Survey page and then pressing the Connect button.
Select an OPEN
(unsecured) WAP
Connecting to the
WAP begins the
communication
FIG. 18 Site Survey of available WAPS (Unsecured WAP shown selected)
Manually entering the SSID information into their appropriate fields by following steps 7
thru 9.
3. From within the Wireless Security section, press the Open (Clear Text) button to open the Open (Clear Text)
Settings dialog (FIG. 19). An Open security method does not utilize any encryption methodology but does require
that an SSID (alpha-numeric) be entered. Using this method causes network packets to be sent out as unencrypted
text.
24
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Configuring Communications
Required Information:
- SSID (Network Name used by the Target WAP)
By default, this field displays the
SSID - AMX
FIG. 19 Wireless Settings page - Open (Clear Text) security method
4. Press the red SSID field (FIG. 19) to display an on-screen Network Name (SSID) keyboard.
5. In this keyboard, enter the SSID name used on your target Wireless Access Point (case sensitive).
The card should be given the SSID used by the target WAP. If this field is left blank, the unit will attempt to
connect to the first available WAP. By default, all WAP200Gs use AMX as their assigned SSID value.
One of the most common problems associated with connection to a WAP arise because the SSID was not
entered properly. You must maintain the same case when entering the SSID information. ABC is not the same
as Abc.
6. Click Done when you’ve completed typing in the information.
7. From the Open (Clear Text) Settings page (FIG. 19), press the Save button to incorporate your new information into
the panel and begin the communication process.
8. Verify the fields in the IP Settings section have been properly configured. Refer to Step 1: Configure the Panel’s
Wireless IP Settings section on page 21 for detailed information.
9. Press the Back button to return to the Protected Setup page and press the on-screen Reboot button to both save any
changes and restart the panel. Remember that you will need to navigate to the System Settings page and configure
the connection to a target Master.
10. After the panel restarts, return to the Wireless Settings page’s RF Link Info section and verify the Link Quality and
Signal Strength:
The descriptions are: None, Poor, Fair, Good, Very Good, and Excellent (FIG. 17).
The signal strength field should provide some descriptive text regarding the strength
of the connection to a Wireless Access Point. If there is no signal or no IP Address
displayed; configuration of your network could be required.
Configuring the Modero’s wireless card for secured access to a WAP200G
After logging into the WAP200G, the default Status page appears within the web browser. These
read-only values are "pulled" from some of the other user-configurable Configuration Utility pages. By default, wireless
Modero panels are configured for unsecured communication to a Wireless Access Point. To properly setup both the
WAP200G and panel for secure communication, you must first prepare the Modero panel and then use the information
given to fill out the fields within the WAP’s browser-based Basic Wireless Configuration page.
Since the code key generator on Modero panels use the same key generation formula, all panels will generate identical
keys for the same Passphrase. The generators used on WAPs will not produce the same key as the Modero generator even
if you use the same Passphrase. For this reason, we recommend FIRST creating the Current Key on the Modero
and then entering that information into the appropriate NXA-WAP200G fields.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
25
Configuring Communications
Automatically set SSID
In the Protected Setup page:
1. Select Wireless Settings.
2. Press the Site Survey button.
3. Select a WEP secured WAP from within the Site Survey page, and press the Connect button .
Select a target
WAP with the
desired level of
security
Connecting to the
WAP begins the
communication
FIG. 20 Site Survey of available WAPs (Secured WAP shown selected)
4. Write down the SSID name, Current Key string value, and panel MAC Address information so you can later enter it
into the appropriate WAP dialog fields in order to "sync-up" the secure connection. These values must be identically
reproduced on the target WAP.
Manually set SSID
In the Protected Setup page:
1. Select Wireless Settings.
2. Locate the Wireless Security section (FIG. 21).
802.11g wireless card
FIG. 21 Wireless Settings page
You must first take down the SSID name, Current Key string value, and panel MAC
Address information so you can later enter it into the appropriate WAP dialog fields in
order to "sync-up" the secure connection. These values must be identically
reproduced on the target WAP.
26
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Configuring Communications
3. Press the Static WEP button to open the Static WEP Settings dialog (FIG. 22).
Required Information:
- SSID (Network Name used by the Target WAP)
- Encryption Method
- Passphrase
- WEP Key assignment
- Authentication Method
FIG. 22 Wireless Settings page - Static WEP security method
4. Press the SSID field and from the Network Name (SSID) keyboard, enter the SSID name you are using on your
target Wireless Access Point (case sensitive), and press Done when finished.
The card should be given the SSID used by the target WAP. If this field is left blank, the unit will attempt to
connect to the first available WAP. By default, all WAP200Gs use AMX as their assigned SSID value.
One of the most common problems associated with connection to a WAP arise because the SSID was not
entered properly. You must maintain the same case when entering this information. ABC is not the same as
Abc.
The alpha-numeric string is by default AMX but can later be changed to any 32-character entry. This string
must be duplicated within the Network Name (SSID) field on the WAP.
As an example, if you use TECHPUBS as your SSID, you must match this word and the case within both
the Network Name (SSID) field on the touch panel’s Network Name SSID field and on the WAP’s Basic
Wireless Configuration page.
5. Toggle the Encryption field (FIG. 22) until it reads either: 64 Bit Key Size or 128 Bit Key Size.
The 64/128 selection reflects the bit-level of encryption security. This WEP encryption level must match the
encryption level being used on the WAP.
WEP will not work unless the same Default Key is set on both the panel and the
Wireless Access Point.
For example: if you have your Wireless Access Point set to default key 4 (which
was 01:02:03:04:05), you must set the panel’s key 4 to 01:02:03:04:05.
6. Toggle the Default Key field until the you’ve chosen a WEP Key value (from 1- 4) that matches what you’ll be
using on your target WAP200G. This value MUST MATCH on both devices.
 These WEP Key identifier values must match for both devices.
7. With the proper WEP Key value displayed, press the Generate button to launch the WEP Passphrase keyboard.
If you are wanting to have your target WAP (other than an NXA-WAP200G) generate the Current Key - Do not
press the Generate button and continue with Step 13.
This keyboard allows you to enter a Passphrase (such as AMXPanel) and then AUTOMATICALLY generate a
WEP key which is compatible only among all Modero panels.
The code key generator on Modero panels use the same key generation formula.
Therefore, this same Passphrase generates identical keys when done on any
Modero because they all use the same Modero-specific generator. The Passphrase
generator is case sensitive.
8. Within this on-screen WEP Passphrase keyboard (FIG. 23), enter a character string or word (such as AMXPanel)
and press Done when you have finished.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
27
Configuring Communications
FIG. 23 WEP Passphrase Keyboard
As an example, enter the word AMXPanel using a 128-bit hex digit encryption. After pressing Done, the on-
screen Current Key field displays a long string of characters (separated by colons) which represents the
encryption key equivalent to the word AMXPanel.
This series of hex digits (26 hex digits for a 128-bit encryption key) should be entered as the Current Key
into both the WAP and onto other communicating Modero panels by using the WEP Key dialog
(FIG. 24).
FIG. 24 WEP Key # Keyboard
9. Write down this Current Key string value for later entry into your WAP’s WEP Key field (typically entered without
colons) and into other communicating panel’s Current Key field (FIG. 24).
10. If you are entering a Current Key generated either by your target WAP or another Modero panel, within the
WEP Keys section, touch the Key # button to launch the WEP Key # keyboard (FIG. 24), enter the characters and
press Done when finished.
This Key value corresponds to the Default WEP Key number used on the Wireless Access Point and selected
in the Default Key field described in the previous step.
If your target Wireless Access Point does not support passphrase key generation and
has previously been setup with a manually entered WEP KEY, you must manually
enter that same WEP key on your panel.
11. The remaining Current Key and Authentication fields are greyed-out and cannot be altered by the user.
12. Verify the fields within the IP Settings section have been properly configured. Refer to Step 1: Configure the
Panel’s Wireless IP Settings section on page 21 for detailed information.
13. Press the Back button to navigate to the Protected Setup page and press the on-screen Reboot button to both save
any changes and restart the panel. Remember that you will need to navigate to the System Settings page and
configure the connection to a target Master.
14. After the panel restarts, return to the Wireless Settings page to verify the Link Quality and Signal Strength:
The descriptions are: None, Poor, Fair, Good, Very Good, and Excellent.
28
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Configuring Communications
The signal strength field provides some descriptive text regarding the strength of the
connection to a Wireless Access Point. If there is no signal or no IP Address
displayed; configuration of your network could be required.
Refer to the NXA-WAP200G Instruction Manual for more detailed setup and configuration procedures.
Configuring multiple wireless Moderos to communicate to a target WAP200G
1. For each communicating touch panel, complete all of the steps outlined within the previous Configuring the
Modero’s wireless card for secured access to a WAP200G section on page 25.
2. Navigate back to the Wireless Settings page on each panel.
3. Verify that all communicating Modero panels are using the same SSID, encryption level, Default Key #, and an
identical Current Key value.
As an example, all panels should be set to Default Key #1 and be using aa:bb:cc..as the Current Key string
value. This same Key value and Current Key string should be used on the target WAP.
4. Repeat steps 1 - 3 on each panel. Using the same passphrase, generates the same key for all communicating
Modero panels.
Step 3: Choose a Master Connection Mode
The panel requires you establish the type of connection you want made between it and your master.
In the Protected Setup page:
1. Select System Settings.
2. Select Type to toggle between the Master Connection Types USB and Ethernet.
A USB connection is a direct connection from the panel’s mini-USB port to a corresponding USB port on the
PC (acting as a Virtual Master).
A Wireless Ethernet connection involves indirect communication from the panel to a Master via a wireless
connection to the network.
It is recommended that firmware KIT files only be transferred over a direct connection
and only when the panel is connected to a power supply. If battery power or wireless
connection fails during a firmware upgrade, the panel flash file system may become
corrupted.
FIG. 25 System Settings page
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
29
Configuring Communications
USB
NetLinx Studio can be setup to run a Virtual Master where the PC acts as the Master by supplying its own IP Address for
communication to the panel. For a PC to establish a USB connection with a Modero panel, it must have the AMX
USBLAN driver installed.
The AMX USBLAN driver is included with both NetLinx Studio2 and TPDesign4, and
can also be downloaded as a stand-alone application from www.amx.com.
Prepare your PC for USB communication with the panel
If you haven’t already done so, download and install the latest versions of NetLinx Studio2 and TPDesign4 (from
www.amx.com), and restart your PC.
Configure the panel for USB communication
The first time the panel is connected to the PC it is detected as a new USB hardware device, and the correct (panelspecific) USBLAN driver must be associated to it manually. Each time thereafter, the panel is recognized as a unique
USBLAN device, and the association to the driver is handled automatically.
1. Connect the PS4.4 power connector to the panel (or docking station if the panel is already installed) to supply
power.
2. Press and hold the two lower external pushbuttons on either side of the panel simultaneously for 3 seconds to access
the Setup page (see FIG. 13 on page 19).
3. In the Protected Settings page, select System Settings to open the System Settings page (FIG. 26).
4. Toggle the blue Type field (from the Master Connection section) until the choice cycles to USB.
Refer to the System Settings Page section on page 54 for information about the fields on this page.
FIG. 26 System Settings page - USB Connection
5. Press the Back button to return to the Protected Setup page.
6. Press Reboot to save changes and restart the panel.
7. When the panel powers up and displays the first panel page, insert the mini-USB connector into the Program Port
on the panel.
It may take a minute for the panel to detect the new connection and send a signal to the PC (indicated by a green
System Connection icon).
30
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Configuring Communications
The first time the panel is recognized by the PC as a new USB device, a USB driver installation popup window
(FIG. 27) is displayed. This window notifies you that the panel has been detected as a USB device, and the
appropriate USB driver is being installed to establish communication with the panel. It also indicates that the AMX
USBLAN driver does not contain a Microsoft® digital signature.
FIG. 27 USB driver installation popup window
8. Click Yes to proceed with the driver installation.
Once the installation is complete, the panel and PC are ready to communicate via USB.
9. Navigate back to the System Settings page.
Configure a Virtual NetLinx Master using NetLinx Studio
A Virtual NetLinx Master (VNM) is used when the target panel is not connected to a physical NetLinx Master. In this
situation, the PC takes on the functions of a Master via a Virtual NetLinx Master. This connection is made by either using
the PC’s Ethernet Address (via TCP/IP using a known PC’s IP Address as the Master) or using a direct mini-USB
connection to communicate directly to the panel.
Before beginning:
1. Verify the panel has been configured to communicate via USB within the System Settings page and that the USB
driver has been properly configured. Refer to the previous section for more information.
2. In NetLinx Studio, select Settings > Master Communication Settings, from the Main menu to open the Master
Communication Settings dialog (FIG. 28).
IP Address of computer
(not needed as this is a direct
USB connection)
FIG. 28 Assigning Communication Settings for a Virtual Master
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
31
Configuring Communications
3. Click the Communications Settings button to open the Communications Settings dialog.
4. Click the NetLinx Master radio button (from the Platform Selection section).
5. Click the Virtual Master radio button (from the Transport Connection Option section).
6. Click the Edit Settings button to open the Virtual NetLinx Master Settings dialog (FIG. 28).
7. Enter the System number (default is 1).
8. Click OK to close all open dialogs and save your settings.
9. Click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window to view the devices on the Virtual System.
10. Right-click on Empty Device Tree/System and select Refresh System to re-populate the list.
The panel will not appear as a device below the virtual system number (in the Online Tree tab) until both the
system number (default = 1) is entered into the Master Connection section of the System Settings page and the
panel is restarted.
The Connection status turns green after a few seconds to indicate an active USB connection to the PC (Virtual
Master).
If the System Connection icon does not turn green, check the USP connection and communication settings
and refresh the system.
Ethernet
1. When using Ethernet, press the listed Mode to toggle through the available connection modes:
Connection Modes
Mode Description
Procedures
Auto
The device connects to the first master that
responds. This setting requires you set the
System Number.
Setting the System Number:
The device connects to the specific IP of a
master via a TCP connection. This setting
requires you set the Master’s IP.
Setting the Master IP:
The device "listens" for the master to initiate
contact. This setting requires you provide the
master with the device’s IP.
Confirm device IP is on the Master URL list. You
can set the Host Name on the device and use it to
locate the device on the master. Host Name is
particularly useful in the DHCP scenario where the
IP address can change.
URL
Listen
1. Select the System Number to open the keypad.
2. Set your System Number select Done.
1. Select the Master IP number to the keyboard.
2. Set your Master IP and select Done.
2. Select the Master Port Number to open the keypad and change this value. The default setting for the port is 1319.
3. Set your Master Port and select Done.
If you have enabled password security on your master you need to set the username and password within the device.
4. Select the blank field Username to open the keyboard.
5. Set your Username and select Done.
6. Select the blank field Password to open the keyboard.
7. Set your Password and select Done.
8. Press the Back button to return to the Protected Setup page.
9. Press the Reboot button to reboot device and confirm changes.
Master Connection to a Virtual Master via Ethernet
When configuring your panel to communicate with a Virtual Master (on your PC) via
wireless Ethernet, the Master IP/URL field must be configured to match the IP
Address of the PC and make sure to use the Virtual System value assigned to the
Virtual Master within NetLinx Studio.
Before beginning:
1. Verify the panel has been configured to communicate with the Wireless Access Point and verify the signal strength
quality bargraph is On.
32
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Configuring Communications
2. Launch NetLinx Studio 2.x (default location is Start > Programs > AMX Control Disc > NetLinx Studio 2 >
NetLinx Studio 2).
3. Select Settings > Master Communication Settings, from the Main menu to open the Master Communication
Settings dialog (FIG. 29).
Enter this IP
into the
Master IP/URL
field on the
System Settings
page
IP Addresses of computer
(also obtained by using the
Start > Run > cmd command)
FIG. 29 Assigning Communication Settings and TCP/IP Settings for a Virtual Master
4. Click the Communications Settings button to open the Communications Settings dialog.
5. Click on the NetLinx Master radio button (from the Platform Selection section) to indicate that you are working as
a NetLinx Master.
6. Click on the Virtual Master radio box (from the Transport Connection Option section) to indicate you are wanting
to configure the PC to communicate with a panel. Everything else such as the Authentication is greyed-out because
you are not going through the Master’s UI.
7. Click the Edit Settings button (on the Communications Settings dialog) to open the Virtual NetLinx Master
Settings dialog (FIG. 29).
8. From within this dialog enter the System number (default is 1) and note the IP Address of the target PC being used
as the Virtual Master. This IP Address can also be obtained by following these procedures:
On your PC, click Start > Run to open the Run dialog.
Enter cmd into the Open field and click OK to open the command DOS prompt.
From the C:\> command line, enter ipconfig to display the IP Address of the PC. This information is entered
into the Master IP/URL field on the panel.
9. Click OK three times to close the open dialogs, save your settings, and return to the main NetLinx Studio
application.
10. Click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window to view the devices on the Virtual System. The default System
value is one.
11. Right-click on the Empty Device Tree/System entry and select Refresh System to re-populate the list.
12. Connect the terminal end of the PS4.4 power cable to the 12 VDC power connector on the side of the stand-alone
touch panel.
If the MVP is installed onto a docking station, feed power to the docked panel by connecting the appropriate
power supply to the docking station.
13. After the panel powers-up, press and hold the two lower buttons on both sides of the display (for 3 seconds) to
continue with the setup process and proceed to the Setup page.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
33
Configuring Communications
14. Select Protected Setup > System Settings (located on the lower-left) to open the System Settings page (FIG. 30).
The System Number is
assigned to the Master
within the AMX
software application
(these must match)
Enter the IP Address
information of the PC
used as a Virtual
Master
When using a Virtual Master,
there is no need to enter a
username and/or password
FIG. 30 Sample System Settings page (for Virtual Master communication)
15. Press the blue Type field (from the Master Connection section) until the choice cycles to the word Ethernet.
16. Press the Mode field until the choice cycles to the word URL.
By selecting URL, the System Number field becomes read-only (grey) because the panel pulls this value
directly from the communicating target Master (virtual or not). A Virtual Master system value can be set
within the active AMX software applications such as: NetLinx Studio, TPD4, or IREdit.
17. Press the Master IP/URL field to open a Keyboard and enter the IP Address of the PC used as the Virtual Master.
18. Click Done to accept the new value and return to the System Settings page.
19. Do not alter the Master Port Number value (this is the default value used by NetLinx).
20. Press the Back button to open the Protected Setup page.
21. Press the on-screen Reboot button to both save any changes and restart the panel.
34
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Configuring Communications
Using G4 Web Control to Interact with a G4 Panel
The G4 Web Control feature allows you to use a PC to interact with a G4 enabled panel via the web. This feature works
in tandem with the new browser-capable NetLinx Security firmware update (build 300 or higher). G4 Web Control is
only available with the latest Modero panel firmware.
Refer to the G4 Web Control Settings/G4 Web Control Page section on page 73 for more detailed field information.
Verify your NetLinx Master (ME260/64 or NI-Series) has been installed with the latest
firmware KIT file from www.amx.com. Refer to your NetLinx Master instruction
manual for more detailed information on the use of the new web-based NetLinx
Security.
1. Press and hold the two lower buttons on both sides of the display for 3 seconds to open the Setup page.
2. Press the Protected Setup button (located on the lower-left of the panel page) to open the Protected Setup page and
display an on-screen keypad.
3. Enter 1988 into the Keypad’s password field (1988 is the default password).
Clearing Password #5, from the initial Password Setup page, removes the need for
you to enter the default password before accessing the Protected Setup page.
4. Press Done when finished.
5. Press the G4 WebControl button to open the G4 Web Control page (FIG. 31).
FIG. 31 G4 Web Control page
6. Press the Enable/Enabled button until it toggles to Enabled (light blue color).
7. The Network Interface Select field is read-only and displays the method of communication to the web.
Wireless is used when a wireless card is detected within the internal card slot. This method provides an
indirect communication to the web via a pre-configured Wireless Access Point.
The Network Interface Select field is read-only and defaulted to Wireless (since
there is no Ethernet cable connection).
8. Press the Web Control Name field to open the Web Name keyboard.
9. From the Web Name keyboard, enter a unique alpha-numeric string to identify this panel. This information is used
by the NetLinx Security Web Server to display on-screen links to the panel. The on-screen links use the IP Address
of the panel and not the name for communication (FIG. 32).
10. Press Done after you are finished assigning the alpha-numeric string for the Web Control name.
11. Press the Web Control Password field to open the Web Password keyboard.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
35
Configuring Communications
FIG. 32 Sample relationship between G4 Web Control and Mange WebControl Connections window
12. From the Web Password keyboard, enter a unique alpha-numeric string to be assigned as the G4 Authentication
session password associated with VNC web access of this panel.
13. Press Done after you are finished assigning the alpha-numeric string for the Web Control password.
14. Press the Web Control Port field to open the Web Port Number keypad.
15. Within the keypad, enter a unique numeric value to be assigned to the port the VNC Web Server is running on. The
default value is 5900.
16. Press Done when you are finished entering the value. The remaining fields within the G4 Web Control Settings
section of this page are read-only and cannot be altered.
17. Press the Up/Down arrows on either sides of the G4 Web Control Timeout field to increase or decrease the amount
of time the panel can remain idle (no cursor movements) before the session is closed and the user is disconnected.
18. Press the Back button to open the Protected Setup page.
19. Press the on-screen Reboot button to save any changes and restart the panel.
Verify your NetLinx Master’s IP Address and System Number have been properly
entered into the Master Connection section of the System Settings page.
36
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Configuring Communications
Using your NetLinx Master to control the G4 panel
Refer to your particular NetLinx Master’s instruction manual for detailed information on how to download the latest
firmware from www.amx.com. This firmware build enables SSL certificate identification and encryption, HTTPS
communication, ICSP data encryption, and disables the ability to alter the Master security properties via a TELNET
session.
In order to fully utilize the SSL encryption, your web browser should incorporate the an encryption
feature. This encryption level is displayed as a Cipher strength.
Once the Master’s IP Address has been set through NetLinx Studio version 2.x or higher:
1. Launch your web browser.
2. Enter the IP Address of the target Master (ex: http://198.198.99.99) into the web browser’s Address field.
3. Press the Enter key on your keyboard to begin the communication process between the target Master and your
computer.
Initially, the Master Security option is disabled (from within the System Security page) and no username and
password is required for access or configuration.
Both HTTP and HTTPS Ports are enabled by default (via the Manage System > Server page).
If the Master has been previously configured for secured communication, click OK to accept the AMX SSL
certificate (if SSL is enabled) and then enter a valid username and password into the fields within the Login
dialog.
4. Click OK to enter the information and proceed to the Master’s Manage WebControl Connections window.
5. This Manage WebControl Connections page (FIG. 33) is accessed by clicking on the Manage connections link
(within the Web Control section within the Navigation frame). Once activated, this page displays links to G4 panels
running the latest G4 Web Control feature (previously setup and activated on the panel).
G4 panels
Compatible
devices field
(showing G4
WebControl links)
Compression
Options
FIG. 33 Manage WebControl Connections page (populated with compatible panels)
6. Click on the G4 panel name link associated with the target panel. A secondary web browser window appears on the
screen (FIG. 34).
7. Click Yes from the Security Alert popup window to agree to the installation of the G4 WebControl application on
your computer. This application contains the necessary Active X and VNC client applications necessary to properly
view and control the panel pages from your computer.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
37
Configuring Communications
FIG. 34 Web Control VNC installation and Password entry screens
The G4 Web Control application is sent by the panel to the computer that is used for
communication. Once the application is installed, this popup will no longer appear.
This popup will only appear if you are connecting to the target panel using a different
computer.
8. In some cases, you might get a Connection Details dialog (FIG. 35) requesting a VNC Server IP Address. This is
the IP Address not the IP of the Master but of the target touch panel. Depending on which method of
communication you are using, it can be found in either the:
Wired Ethernet - System Settings > IP Settings section within the IP Address field.
Wireless - Wireless Settings > IP Settings section within the IP Address field.
If you do not get this field continue to step 9.
IP Address of touch panel
- obtained from IP Settings section of
the Wireless Settings page (MVP)
FIG. 35 Connection Details dialog
9. If a WebControl password was setup on the G4 WebControl page, a G4 Authentication Session password dialog
box appears on the screen within the secondary browser window.
10. Enter the Web Control session password into the Session Password field (FIG. 35). This password was previously
entered into the Web Control Password field within the G4 Web Control page on the panel.
11. Click OK to send the password to the panel and begin the session. A confirmation message appears stating "Please
wait, Initial screen loading..".
The secondary window then becomes populated with the same G4 page being displayed on the target G4 panel. A small
circle appears within the on-screen G4 panel page and corresponds to the location of the mouse cursor. A left-mouse
click on the computer-displayed panel page equates to an actual touch on the target G4 panel page.
38
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Upgrading MVP Firmware
Upgrading MVP Firmware
Except for the MVP-KS (Kickstand for MVP Panels), all MVP panels and their accessories have on-board firmware
which is upgradeable through the use of the latest NetLinx Studio. The MVP acts as a bridge between the NetLinx
Studio program and the installed docking station. Studio can download firmware to the target docking station by using
the connected MVP to pass-along the Kit file to the docking station. Refer to the NetLinx Studio version 2.x or higher
Instruction Manual for more information on how to download firmware to both a panel and a docking station.
The latest firmware 2.70.xx (or higher) kit file is panel-specific.
This new firmware also provides both backwards compatibility with the previous
802.11b cards and new security protocols for the new 802.11g wireless CF card.
1. Upload the latest Kit file (SW5965_xx version 2.70.xx or higher) to your specific Modero touch panel and then
confirm the firmware file update was successful. Refer to your panel’s instruction manual for detailed
communication and Kit file upload procedures.
If you don’t first update the firmware file on the panel, before proceeding with the card
upgrade process, you will be required to configure NetLinx Studio to communicate
with the target panel via a direct USB connection.
In this communication scenario, your PC acts as a Virtual NetLinx Master establishing
a secure USB connection to the target panel and then uploading the new Kit file.
Before beginning the Upgrade process:
Setup and configure your NetLinx Master. Refer to the your particular NetLinx Master Instruction Manual for
detailed setup procedures.
Calibrate and prepare the communication pages on the Modero panel for use. Refer to the Panel
Calibration section on page 155.
Refer to the NetLinx Studio version 2.x or higher Help file for more information on uploading files via
Ethernet.
Configure your panel for either direct connect or wireless communication. Refer to the Configuring
Communications section on page 19 for more detailed information about Ethernet or Wireless
communication.
It is recommended that firmware Kit files only be transferred over a direct connection
and only when the panel is connected to a power supply.
If battery power or wireless connection fails during a firmware upgrade, the panel
flash file system may become corrupted.
The process of updating firmware involves the use of a communicating NetLinx Master. The required steps for updating
firmware to a Modero panel are virtually identical to those necessary for updating Kit files to a NetLinx Master (except
the target device is a panel instead of a Master). Refer to either your Master’s literature or Studio 2.x Help file for those
procedures.
A touch panel which is not using a valid username and password will not be able to
communicate with a secured Master. If you are updating the firmware on or through a
panel which is not using a username or password field, you must first remove the
Master Security feature to establish an unsecured connection.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
39
Upgrading MVP Firmware
Upgrading the Modero Firmware via the USB port
Before beginning with this section, verify your panel is powered and the Type-A USB connector is securely inserted into
the PC’s USB port. The panel must be powered-on before connecting the mini-USB connector to the panel.
Establishing a USB connection between the PC and the panel, prior to installing the
USB Driver will cause a failure in the USB driver installation.
Step 1: Configure the panel for a USB Connection Type
1. After the installation of the USB driver has been completed, confirm the proper installation of the large Type-A
USB connector to the PC's USB port, and restart your machine.
2. After the panel powers-up, press and hold the two lower buttons on both sides of the display for
3 seconds to continue with the setup process and proceed to the Setup page.
3. Select Protected Setup > System Settings (located on the lower-left) to open the System Settings page.
4. Toggle the blue Type field (from the Master Connection section) until the choice cycles to USB.
ALL fields are then greyed-out and read-only, but still display any previous network
information.
5. Press the Back button on the touch panel to return to the Protected Setup page.
6. Press the on-screen Reboot button to both save any changes and restart the panel. Remember that the panel’s
connection type must be set to USB prior to rebooting the panel and prior to inserting the USB connector.
7. ONLY AFTER the unit displays the first panel page, THEN insert the mini-USB connector into the Program Port
on the panel. It may take a minute for the panel to detect the new connection and send a signal to the PC (indicated
by a green System Connection icon).
If a few minutes have gone by and the System Connection icon still does not turn green, complete the
procedures in the following section to setup the Virtual Master and refresh the System from the Online Tree.
This action sends out a request to the panel to respond and completes the communication (turning the System
Connection icon green).
8. Navigate back to the System Settings page.
Step 2: Prepare Studio for communication via the USB port
1. Launch NetLinx Studio 2.x (default location is Start > Programs > AMX Control Disc > NetLinx Studio 2 >
NetLinx Studio 2).
2. Select Settings > Master Communication Settings, from the Main menu to open the Master Communication
Settings dialog (FIG. 36).
IP Address of computer
(not needed as this is a direct
USB connection)
FIG. 36 Assigning Communication Settings for a Virtual Master
3. Click the Communications Settings button to open the Communications Settings dialog.
40
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Upgrading MVP Firmware
4. Click on the NetLinx Master radio button (from the Platform Selection section) to indicate that you are working as
a NetLinx Master.
5. Click on the Virtual Master radio box (from the Transport Connection Option section) to indicate you are wanting
to configure the PC to communicate directly with a panel. Everything else such as the Authentication is greyed-out
because you are not going through the Master’s UI.
6. Click the Edit Settings button (on the Communications Settings dialog) to open the Virtual NetLinx Master Settings
dialog (FIG. 36).
7. From within this dialog enter the System number (default is 1).
8. Click OK three times to close the open dialogs, save your settings, and return to the main NetLinx Studio
application.
9. Click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window to view the devices on the Virtual System.
The default System value is one.
10. Right-click on the Empty Device Tree/System entry and select Refresh System to re-populate the list.
The panel will not appear as a device below the virtual system number (in the Online Tree tab) until both the
system number used in step 7 for the VNM is entered into the Master Connection section of the System Settings
page and the panel is restarted.
Step 3: Confirm and Upgrade the firmware via the USB port
Use the CC-USB Type-A to Mini-B 5-wire programming cable (FG10-5965) to provide communication between the
mini-USB Program port on the touch panel and the PC. This method of communication is used to transfer firmware Kit
files and TPD4 touch panel files.
A mini-USB connection is only detected after it is installed onto an active panel.
Connection to a previously powered panel which then reboots, allows the PC to
detect the panel and assign an appropriate USB driver.
1. Verify this direct USB connection (Type-A on the panel to mini-USB on the panel) is configured properly using the
steps outlined in the previous two sections.
2. With the panel already configured for USB communication and the Virtual Master setup within NetLinx Studio, its
now time to verify the panel is ready to receive files.
3. After the Communication Verification dialog window verifies active communication between the Virtual Master
and the panel, click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window (FIG. 37) to view the devices on the Virtual
System. The default System value is one.
4. Right-click on the System entry (FIG. 37) and select Refresh System to re-populate the list. Verify the panel
appears in the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window.
The default Modero panel value is 10001.
Showing the Virtual Master
firmware version and
device number
Shows NetLinx Studio
version number
Showing the current MVP
panel firmware version and
device number
FIG. 37 NetLinx Workspace window (showing panel connection via a Virtual NetLinx Master)
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
41
Upgrading MVP Firmware
The panel-specific firmware is shown on the right of the listed panel.
Download the latest firmware file from www.amx.com and then save the Kit file to
your computer. Note that each kit file is intended for download to its corresponding
panel.
5. If the panel firmware version is not the latest available; locate the latest firmware file from the www.amx.com >
Tech Center > Downloadable Files > Firmware Files > Modero Panels section of the website.
6. Click on the desired Kit file link and after you’ve accepted the Licensing Agreement, verify you have downloaded
the Modero Kit file to a known location.
7. Select Tools > Firmware Transfers > Send to NetLinx Device from the Main menu to open the Send to NetLinx
Device dialog (B in FIG. 38). Verify the panel’s System and Device number values match those values listed within
the System folder in the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window (A in FIG. 38).
A
B
FIG. 38 Using USB for a Virtual Master transfer
8. Select the panel’s Kit file from the Files section.
9. Enter the Device value associated with the panel and the System number associated with the Master (listed in the
OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window). The Port field is greyed-out.
10. Click the Reboot Device checkbox. This causes the touch panel to reboot after the firmware update process is
complete. The reboot of the panel can take up 30 seconds after the firmware process has finished.
11. Click Send to begin the transfer. The file transfer progress is indicated on the bottom-right of the dialog (B in
FIG. 38).
12. As the panel is rebooting, temporarily unplug the USB connector on the panel until the panel has completely
restarted.
13. Once the first panel page has been displayed, reconnect the USB connector to the panel.
14. Right-click the associated System number and select Refresh System. This causes a refresh of all project systems,
establishes a new connection to the Master, and populates the System list with devices on your particular system.
15. Confirm the panel has been properly updated to the correct firmware version.
42
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Upgrading MVP Firmware
Upgrading the Docking Station Firmware via USB
The following accessory devices are firmware upgradeable:
MVP-TDS Table Top Docking Station (FG5965-10)
MVP-WDS Wall/Flush Mount Docking Station - Black (FG5965-11)
MVP-WDS Wall/Flush Mount Docking Station - Silver (FG5965-21)
This device is not given a unique device number which would ordinarily appear within the Online Tree tab of NetLinx
Studio. It appears as a battery base below the target panel which it is a part of as seen below in FIG. 39.
Target Panel Device #
TDS/WDS
(station version)
NetLinx Studio Online Tree tab
Accessory’s corresponding firmware page
FIG. 39 Location of Firmware version information within NetLinx Studio
The only way to upgrade the firmware of these accessory items is to send the accessory’s firmware through a target
panel. Its this panel’s device number which is entered within the Send to NetLinx Device transfer dialog in Studio.
Step 1: Prepare the Docking Station for firmware transfer via USB
Before beginning with this section:
Verify the MVP is securely attached to the docking station and communicating properly.
Verify that the panel is communicating from the mini-USB port to the Virtual NetLinx Master (VNM).
1. Complete the instructions for configuring the NetLinx Master for IP communication found in the Upgrading the
Modero Firmware via the USB port section on page 40.
2. After the panel powers-up, press and hold the two lower buttons on both sides of the display for
3 seconds to continue with the setup process and proceed to the Setup page.
3. Press the Batteries button to open the Batteries page (FIG. 40).
Displays the current
docking station firmware version
FIG. 40 Batteries page
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
43
Upgrading MVP Firmware
The docking station firmware is shown on the right of the Batteries page.
Verify you have downloaded the latest firmware file from www.amx.com and then
save the Kit file to your computer.
Step 2: Upgrade the Docking Station firmware via USB
1. Complete the procedures outlined in the Step 1: Configure the panel for a USB Connection Type section on page 40.
2. Prepare NetLinx Studio for communication to the panel via a Virtual Master by following the procedures outlined
in the Step 2: Prepare Studio for communication via the USB port section on page 40.
3. After the Communication Verification dialog window verifies active communication between the Virtual Master
and the panel, click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window to view the devices on the Virtual System. The
default System value is one.
4. Right-click on the System entry and select Refresh System to re-populate the list. Verify the panel appears in the
OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window.
The default Modero panel value is 10001.
5. Locate the latest firmware file from the www.amx.com > Tech Center > Downloadable Files > Firmware Files >
Modero Panels firmware (MVP Docking Stations: MVP-TDS/WDS) section of the website.
6. Click on the desired Kit file link and after you’ve accepted the Licensing Agreement, verify you have downloaded
the Docking Station Kit file to a known location.
7. Select Tools > Firmware Transfers > Send to NetLinx Device from the Main menu to open the Send to NetLinx
Device dialog (FIG. 41). Verify the panel’s System and Device number values match those values listed within the
System folder in the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window.
Selected Docking Station Firmware file
Description field for selected Kit file
Firmware download
status
Device and System values
must match the System and Device values
listed in the Project Navigator window
FIG. 41 Send to NetLinx Device dialog (showing docking station firmware update via USB)
8. Select the docking station’s Kit file (ending in VXX.kit) from the Files section (FIG. 41).
9. Enter the Device number associated with the panel and the System number associated with the Master (listed in the
OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window). The Port field is greyed-out.
Firmware upgrades can not be done directly to the docking station but must be routed
through the MVP panel.
44
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Upgrading MVP Firmware
10. Click the Reboot Device checkbox. This causes the touch panel to reboot after the firmware update process is
complete. The reboot of the panel can take up 30 seconds after the firmware process has finished.
11. Click Send to begin the transfer. The file transfer progress is indicated on the bottom-right of the dialog.
12. As the panel is rebooting, temporarily unplug the USB connector on the panel until the panel has completely
restarted.
13. Once the first panel page has been displayed, reconnect the USB connector to the panel.
14. Right-click the associated System number and select Refresh System. This causes a refresh of all project systems,
establishes a new connection to the Master, and populates the System list with devices on your particular system.
15. After the panel powers-up, press and hold the two lower buttons on both sides of the display for
3 seconds to continue with the setup process and proceed to the Setup page.
16. Press the Batteries button (located on the lower-left) to open the Batteries page and confirm the new firmware does
not read 0.00.
If the Base Version field displays 0.00, this means there was an error in the firmware
upload process. Re-install the base firmware and re-confirm that the new base
version no longer reads 0.00.
Although firmware upgrades can be done over wireless Ethernet; it is recommended
that firmware KIT files be transferred over a direct USB connection and only when the
panel is connected to a power supply. If battery power or wireless connection fails
during a firmware upgrade, the panel flash file system may become corrupted.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
45
Upgrading MVP Firmware
46
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Setup Pages
Setup Pages
AMX Modero panels feature on-board Setup pages. Use the options in the Setup pages to access panel information and
make various configuration changes.
To access the Setup pages, press the two lower external pushbuttons on either side of the panel simultaneously and hold
for 3 seconds (FIG. 42).
Setup Page Access buttons:
Press and hold simultaneously for
3 seconds to access the Setup pages
Press and hold for 6 seconds
to access the Calibration page.
FIG. 42 Setup Page Access buttons
Setup Pages
The Setup page (FIG. 43) allows quick access to several basic panel properties:
MVP-7500
MVP-8400
FIG. 43 MVP-7500 and MVP-8400 Setup pages
Features on this page include:
Setup Page
Navigation Buttons:
The buttons along on the left side of the page provide access to secondary Setup
pages (see following sections).
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired (image of
three networked computers).
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
47
Setup Pages
Setup Page (Cont.)
Connection Status icon: The icon in the upper-right corner of each Setup page shows online/offline state of
the panel to the master.
• Bright red - disconnected
• Bright green - connected. Blinks when a blink message is received to dark green
every 5 seconds for half a second then go back to bright green.
• Bright yellow - panel missed a blink message from the master. It will remain
yellow for 3 missed blink messages and then turn red. It will return to green
when a blink message is received.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
Connection Status:
Displays whether the panel is communicating externally as well as the encryption
status of the Master, the connection type (Ethernet or USB), and what System the
panel is connected to.
• Until a connection is established, the message displayed is: “Attempting via...”.
• When a connection is established, the message displayed is either: “Connected
via Ethernet “or “Connected via USB “.
• The word “Encrypted” appears when an encrypted connection is established
with a NetLinx Master.
Note: The panel must be rebooted before incorporating any panel communication
changes and to detect Ethernet connections.
Display Timeout:
Indicates the length of time that the panel can remain idle before activating Sleep
mode (causing the LCD to power down).
• Press the UP/DN buttons to increase/decrease the Display Timeout setting.
Range = 0 - 240 (minutes).
• Set the timeout value to zero to disable Sleep mode.
Note: Small timeout values maximize the life of the battery charge.
Display Timeout on
Battery Power
(MVP-8400 only)
When enabled, this button allows the device to engage Display Timeout when the
device has been removed from a charging station and is running solely on battery
power. When disabled (the button goes dark), Display Timeout is not engaged, and
the device will continue to run at full power until it is returned to a charging station
or the device’s battery is depleted.
Inactivity Page Flip
Timeout:
Indicates the length of time that the panel can remain idle before automatically
flipping to a pre-selected page.
• Press the UP/DN buttons to increase/decrease the Inactivity Page Flip Timeout
setting. Range = 0 - 240 (minutes).
• Set the timeout value to zero to disable Inactivity Page Flip mode.
Note: The touch panel page used for the Inactivity page flip is shown within a small
Inactivity Page field.
Panel Brightness:
(MVP-8400 only)
Sets the display brightness level of the panel.
• Press the UP/DN buttons to adjust the brightness level. Range = 0 - 100.
Note: The on-screen bargraph can be dragged to adjust the brightness level which
is then reflected as a numeric value in the Panel Brightness field.
LCD Control:
(MVP-7500 only)
Sets the display brightness and contrast levels of the panel.
• Press the Brightness UP/DN buttons to adjust the brightness level.
Range = 0 - 100.
• Press the Contrast UP/DN buttons to adjust the contrast level. Range = 0 - 100.
48
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Setup Pages
Navigation Buttons
The following Navigation buttons (FIG. 44 and FIG. 45) appear on the left side of the Setup page:
Press to access the Protected Setup page for panel calibration and to access
security release passwords and connection settings.
Press to access the Information menu and select either Project Information or
Panel Information.
Press to access the Time Adjustment page where you can alter the time and
date settings on the Master.
Press to access the Volume page where you can adjust audio parameters on the
panel.
Press to access the access the Batteries page to monitor MVP-BP Power Pack
status in the panel as well as the docking station.
FIG. 44 Setup Page Navigation Buttons (MVP-7500)
Closes the Setup page
Press to access the Protected Setup page for panel calibration and to access
security release passwords and connection settings.
Press to access the Information menu and select either Project Information or
Panel Information.
Press to access the Time Adjustment page where you can alter the time and
date settings on the Master.
Press to access the Volume page where you can adjust audio parameters on the
panel.
Press to access the access the Batteries page to monitor MVP-BP Power Pack
status in the panel as well as the docking station.
FIG. 45 Setup Page Navigation Buttons (MVP-8400)
Custom Logo
The custom logo feature allows a user to customize the boot splash screen with a JPEG image. The custom logo will be
displayed a short time after the standard AMX logo appears and will be visible until the user pages are loaded. Adding a
custom logo to a panel is done by importing an image into the resource manager of the user pages in TPDesign.
Afterwards, transfer the user pages to the panel and reboot to see the new logo. The following guidelines must be
followed:
The custom logo image must be a JPEG
Once the image is imported into the resource manager, it should be renamed to "custom_logo.jpg" (case
sensitive)
The image resolution should match the panel resolution
The image should be saved with 2x2,1x1,1x1 sub-sampling. Different image editing tools implement this in
different ways. If you are unsure how to set this with your application and you are having issues, try saving
with a lower quality setting.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
49
Setup Pages
Protected Setup Pages
The Protected Setup page (FIG. 46 and FIG. 47) provides secured access to advanced panel configuration options,
including communication and security settings.
Enter the factory default password (1988) into the password keypad to access this page.
FIG. 46 Protected Setup Page showing default values (MVP-7500)
FIG. 47 Protected Setup page showing default values (MVP-8400)
50
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Setup Pages
Features on the Protected Setup page include:
Protected Setup Page
Navigation Buttons:
The buttons along on the left side of the page provide access to secondary
Protected Setup pages (see following sections).
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired
(image of three networked computers).
Connection Status icon:
The icon in the upper-right corner of each Setup page shows online/offline state
of the panel to the master.
• Bright red - disconnected
• Bright green - connected. Blinks when a blink message is received to dark
green every 5 seconds for half a second then go back to bright green.
• Bright yellow - panel missed a blink message from the master. It will remain
yellow for 3 missed blink messages and then turn red. It will return to green
when a blink message is received.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
Device Number:
Opens a keypad used to view/set the device number of the panel.
Options:
• Function Show - toggles the display of the channel port, channel code, level
port and level code on all touch panel buttons (see FIG. 48).
• Page Tracking - toggles the page tracking function. When enabled, the
panel reports page data to the NetLinx Master.
• Telnet - enables/disables the panel’s telnet server (to allow direct telnet
communication to the panel).
• Front Button Setup Access - activates the two lower buttons on the front of
the panel for accessing the Setup and Calibration pages (see FIG. 42 on
page 47). The default setting is On.
- Press and hold these buttons for 3 seconds to access the Setup page.
- Press and hold these buttons for 6 seconds to access the Calibration page.
• Use the Security button to toggle between three security settings: Standard
Security, Secure, and DoD. Refer to the Security Settings section on page 57
for very important information on using this feature.
System Recovery:
• Reset System Settings - deletes all of the current configuration parameters
on the panel (including IP Addresses, Device Number assignments,
Passwords, and other presets). This option invokes a Confirmation dialog,
prompting you to confirm your selection before resetting the panel.
System Recovery (Cont.):
• Remove User Pages - allows you remove all TPD4 touch panel pages
currently on the panel, including the pre-installed AMX Demo pages. This
option invokes a Confirmation dialog, prompting you to confirm your
selection before removing the panel pages.
Note that the YES button on the Confirmation dialog is disabled for 5 seconds
as additional protection against accidentally resetting the panel or removing
the panel pages.
Reboot Panel:
Pressing this button causes the panel to reboot after saving any changes.
Docking Station:
• Dock Status - illuminates when the MVP is docked and communicating with
the Docking Station.
• Undock Panel - forces the docking station to release the MVP without
requiring a User Access username or password.
• Disable Docking Station LED - disables the display of the LEDs on the
docking station.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
51
Setup Pages
Channel Code
Channel Port
3,132
BUTTON
2,8
3,50
Address Port
Address Code
Level Port
Channel Code
FIG. 48 Function Show example
Protected Setup Navigation Buttons
The Protected Setup Navigation Buttons (FIG. 49 and FIG. 50) appear on the left of the panel screen when the Protected
Setup page is currently active.
Closes the Protected Setup page.
Press to access the System Settings page where you can configure
communication settings for the NetLinx Master and the panel.
Press to access the Wireless Settings page where you can configure wireless
connection settings.
Press to access the Calibration page where you can calibrate the panel. Press and
hold to access the Calibration Test page.
Press to access the G4 Web Control page where you can enable or disable remote
display and control of the panel via a web-enabled PC running a VNC client.
Press to access the Other Settings menu, and select Cache, Passwords, or
SIP.
Press to access the Tools menu and select Panel Logs, Panel Statistics, or
Connection Utility.
FIG. 49 Protected Setup Navigation Buttons (MVP-7500)
Closes the Protected Setup page.
Press to access the System Settings page where you can configure
communication settings for the NetLinx Master and the panel.
Press to access the Wireless Settings page where you can configure wireless
connection settings.
Press to access the Calibration page where you can calibrate the panel. Press and
hold to access the Calibration Test page.
Press to access the G4 Web Control page where you can enable or disable remote
display and control of the panel via a web-enabled PC running a VNC client.
Press to access the Other Settings menu, and select Cache, Passwords, or
SIP.
Press to access the Tools menu and select Panel Logs, Panel Statistics, or
Connection Utility.
FIG. 50 Protected Setup Navigation Buttons (MVP-8400)
52
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Setup Pages
Security Settings
The Security button on the Protected Setup page has three settings: Standard Security, Secure, and DoD. Each setting
has different features for touch panel security:
Security Profile Features
Standard Security: • Factory default, shipped in this configuration.
• Default Protected Setup Password is “1988”.
• Remote login uses Telnet.
Secure:
• Default Protected Setup Password is “Amx1234!”.
• Minimum password requirement is 8 characters with at least one numeric character.
• Remote login uses SSH.
• Remote login user name is “amx”.
• Login failure attempt pauses 4 seconds before another login attempt is allowed.
• After 3 consecutive unsuccessful SSH login attempts, login lockout is enabled for 15
minutes.
• Login and logout audit logging is enabled.
DOD:
• Default Protected Setup Password is “Amx1234!”.
• Minimum password requirement is 8 characters with at least one numeric character,
one uppercase character, one lower case character, and one special character, with
no duplicate adjacent characters.
• Remote login uses SSH.
• Remote login user name is “amx”.
• Login failure attempt pauses 4 seconds before another login attempt is allowed.
• After 3 consecutive unsuccessful SSH login attempts, login lockout is enabled for 15
minutes.
• Login and logout audit logging is enabled.
• DoD login banner is enabled.
Toggling between these three immediately and automatically resets the existing password to the default password for that
setting. With an unsecured panel using the Standard Security setting, the default password is 1988. With panels using
either the Secure or the DoD settings, the default password is Amx1234! (paying attention to the case of the letters).
Entering the existing password will not work and the default will need to be entered at this point will allow access to the
Protected Settings page and allow resetting of the password to a new one.
If the Security button setting is changed in any way, even if it is toggled back to its
original setting, the password is automatically reset to the default for the chosen
setting. You MUST use the new default of 1988 (Standard Security) or Amx1234!
(Secure or DoD) to re-enter the Protected Settings page.
For more information on configuring AMX devices for a secure environment, please refer to the guide Security Profiles:
Configuring AMX Devices For Installation Into a Secure Environment, available at www.amx.com.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
53
Setup Pages
System Settings Page
The System Settings page (FIG. 51 and FIG. 52) displays sets the NetLinx Master’s communication settings.
FIG. 51 System Settings page (MVP-7500)
FIG. 52 System Settings page (MVP-8400)
The elements of this page include:
System Settings Page Elements
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired
(image of three networked computers).
Connection Status icon:
The icon in the upper-right corner of each Setup page shows online/offline state
of the panel to the master.
• Bright red - disconnected
• Bright green - connected. Blinks when a blink message is received to dark
green every 5 seconds for half a second then go back to bright green.
• Bright yellow - panel missed a blink message from the master. It will remain
yellow for 3 missed blink messages and then turn red. It will return to green
when a blink message is received.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
54
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Setup Pages
System Settings Page Elements (Cont.)
Master Connection:
Type
Sets the NetLinx Master communication values:
Sets the NetLinx Master to communicate with the panel via either USB or
Ethernet. This is based on the cable connection from the rear.
Note: ICSNet is not a supported option on this panel.
• Ethernet is a CAT-5 cable (10/100Base T terminated in an RJ-45 connector)
used to network computers together and is used in most LAN (local area
networks). This description is also used to refer to both wired and wireless
communication.
• USB option cannot be used on Modero panels which are not equipped with a
rear USB port.
Master Connection (Cont.):
Mode
Cycles between the connection modes: URL, Listen, and Auto.
(Ethernet Only - disabled when USB is selected)
• URL - In this mode, enter the IP/URL, Master Port Number, and username/
password (if used) on the Master. The System Number field is read-only - the
panel obtains this information from the Master.
• Listen - In this mode, add the panel address into the URL List in NetLinx
Studio and set the connection mode to Listen. This mode allows the Modero
touch panel to “listen” for the Master’s communication signals. The System
Number and Master IP/URL fields are read-only.
• Auto - In this mode, enter the System Number and a username/password (if
applicable). Use this mode when both the panel and the NetLinx Master are
on the same Subnet, and the Master has its UDP feature enabled. The
Master IP/URL field is read-only.
System Number
Allows you to enter a system number. Default value is 0 (zero).
(ETHERNET Only - disabled when USB is selected)
Master IP/URL
Sets the Master IP or URL of the NetLinx Master.
(ETHERNET Only - disabled when USB is selected)
Master Port Number
Allows you to enter the port number used with the NetLinx Master.
• Default = 1319
(ETHERNET Only - disabled when USB is selected)
Username/Password
If the target Master has been previously secured, enter the alpha-numeric string
(into each field) assigned to a pre-configured user profile on the Master. This
profile should have the pre-defined level of access/configuration rights.
Refer to the Step 3: Choose a Master Connection Mode section on page 29 for more detailed information on using the
System Settings page.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
55
Setup Pages
Wireless Settings Page
Use the options on the Wireless Settings page (FIG. 53 and FIG. 54) to configure communication settings for the wireless
CF card (802.11b/g), and read the device number assigned to the panel.
FIG. 53 Wireless Settings Page (MVP-7500)
FIG. 54 Wireless Settings Page (MVP-8400)
Features on this page include:
Wireless Settings Page
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired
(image of three networked computers).
Connection Status icon:
The icon in the upper-right corner of each Setup page shows online/offline state
of the panel to the master.
• Bright red - disconnected
• Bright green - connected. Blinks when a blink message is received to dark
green every 5 seconds for half a second then go back to bright green.
• Bright yellow - panel missed a blink message from the master. It will remain
yellow for 3 missed blink messages and then turn red. It will return to green
when a blink message is received.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
56
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Setup Pages
Wireless Settings Page (Cont.)
IP Settings:
DHCP/STATIC
Sets the IP communication values for the panel:
Sets the panel to either DHCP or Static communication modes.
• DHCP - a temporary IP Addresses is assigned to the panel by a DHCP
server.
• Static IP is a permanent IP Address assigned to the panel. If Static IP is
selected, the other IP Settings fields are enabled (below).
IP Address
Enter the secondary IP address for this panel.
Subnet Mask
Enter the subnetwork address for this panel.
Gateway
Enter the gateway address for this panel.
Host Name
Enter the host name for this panel.
Primary DNS
Enter the address of the primary DNS server used by this panel for host name
lookups.
Secondary DNS
Enter the secondary DNS address for this panel.
Domain
Enter a unique name to the panel for DNS look-up.
MAC Address
This unique address identifies the wireless Ethernet card in the panel
(read-only).
Active Roaming on
Channels 1,6,11
When enabled, the device is actively roaming on the channels 1, 6, and 11. By
default, Active Roaming is disabled.
Of all the frequency channels that are assigned for wireless, only three are
non-overlapping frequencies that do not interfere with each other.
Non-overlapping channels avoid the interference that can affect the signal.
Access Point MAC
Address:
This unique address identifies the Wireless Access Point (WAP) used by this
panel for wireless communication (read-only).
• Site Survey button: Launches the Site Survey page. The options on this
page allow you to detect (“sniff-out”) all WAPs transmitting within range of the
panel’s NXA-WC80211GCF Wi-Fi card.
Data displayed on the Site Survey page is categorized by:
- Network Name (SSID) - WAP names
- Channel (RF) - channels currently being used by the WAP
- Security Type - security protocol enabled on the WAP, if detectable
- Signal Strength - None, Poor, Fair, Good, Very Good, and Excellent
- MAC Address - Unique identification of the transmitting Access Point
• Refer to the Using the Site Survey tool section on page 22 for more detailed
information on the SIte Survey page.
• When communicating with a NXA- WAP200G, enter the MAC Address
(BSSID) of the target WAP as the Access Point MAC Address. Refer to the
WAP200G Instruction Manual for more information.
Roaming:
This button allows selection between three states: Disabled, Active, and
Averaged:
• Disabled - No roaming: this setting will not scan for SSIDs until the panel
loses its connection to the WAP. It will then roam to first matching SSID it
finds on any channel.
• Active - Faster roaming. This setting actively scans channels 1, 6, and 11
for matching IDs
• Averaged - Slower roaming: designed for noisy wireless environments. This
setting actively selects channels 1. 6, and 11 for matching SSIDs. When the
site survey falls below -65dBm, the connection will roam to the nearest
access point to a connection whose site survey is at least 10 dBm better than
the previous one.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
57
Setup Pages
Wireless Settings Page (Cont.)
Channel Selection:
Pressing this button presents a popup that gives the user the option, in highinterference areas, of excluding three channel groups in order to find the best
possible connection.
• Channel 1 includes channels 1, 2, and 3.
• Channel 6 includes channels 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.
• Channel 11 includes channels 9, 10, 11, 12, and 13.
The default on the popup allows scanning on all three channel groups. Click
the checkmark to exclude each channel group: any excluded channel group will
be marked with a red "X".
Information:
Pressing this button opens a popup that explains the particular functions of the
Roaming and Channel Selection buttons.
Site Survey:
Launches the Site Survey page. The options on this page allow you to detect
(“sniff-out”) all WAPs transmitting within range of the panel’s NXAWC80211GCF Wi-Fi card (this feature is not available with the 802.11b).
Data displayed on the Site Survey page is categorized by:
- Network Name (SSID) - WAP names
- Channel (RF) - channels currently being used by the WAP
- Security Type - security protocol enabled on the WAP, if detectable
- Signal Strength - None, Poor, Fair, Good, Very Good, and Excellent
- MAC Address - Unique identification of the transmitting Access Point
• Refer to the Using the Site Survey tool section on page 22 for more detailed
information on the SIte Survey page.
When communicating with a NXA- WAP200G, enter the MAC Address (BSSID)
of the target WAP as the Access Point MAC Address. Refer to the WAP200G
Instruction Manual for more information.
Information/Configuration: • Mode - Displays the current Security Type selected via either the Simple or
Enterprise options.
• Security Type - Displays whether the currently used security type is Simple
or Enterprise.
• SSID - Displays the currently used SSID of the target WAP.
• Channel - The RF channel being used for connection to the WAP (readonly).
• Signal Level Value - Displays the quality of the link from the wireless NIC to
the Wireless Access Point (direct sequence spread spectrum) in real time
(None, Poor, Fair, Good, Very Good, and Excellent).Even when link quality is
at its lowest you still have a connection, and the ability to transmit and
receive data, even if at lower speeds.
Note: “Signal Level Value” and “Signal Level” are applicable to RF connections
only. It is possible to have an RF signal to a WAP, but be unable to
communicate with it because of either incorrect IP or encryption settings.
• Signal Level - This bar graph demonstrates the strength of the current
signal.
Simple/Enterprise:
• Opens either the Wireless Security: Simple Mode or the Wireless Security:
Enterprise Mode windows.
Pressing the Simple or Enterprise buttons at the bottom of the Information/Configuration section open an appropriate
Wireless Security window for Simple Mode (FIG. 55) or Enterprise Mode (FIG. 56). Simple Mode is best used for
smaller installations that use a single Master, such as for residences or smaller office environments. Enterprise Mode is
intended for installations that use multiple Masters, where a wireless device may need to switch between multiple
wireless access points connected to different Masters in a network.
58
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Setup Pages
FIG. 55 Wireless Security: Simple Mode
Wireless Security: Simple Mode
Security Type:
This field may be switched between WEP, WPA-PSK, and Open. If WEP is
selected, the button to the right may be switched between 64 and 128.
• WEP security requires that both a target WAP be identified and an encryption
method be implemented prior to establishing communication. (Refer to the
WEP Settings section on page 62 for further details.)
• WPA-PSK security is designed for environments where is it desirable to use
WPA or WPA2, but an 802.1x authentication server is not available. PSK
connections are more secure than WEP and are simpler to configure since
they implement dynamic keys but share a key between the WAP and the
panel (client). (Refer to the WPA-PSK Settings section on page 63 for further
details.)
• Open security does not utilize any encryption methodology, but requires an
SSID (alpha-numeric) entry. This entry must match the Network Name (SSID)
entry of the target WAP so the panel knows what device it is using to
communicate with the network. (Refer to the following Open Settings section
on page 61 for further details.)
SSID:
Press this field to enter a 32-character Network Name in the Network Name
keypad.
Password:
This field is only enabled when WPA-PSK is selected as the Security Type.
Clicking this field opens the Password/Pass Phrase keyboard
WEP Keys:
These buttons are only enabled when WEP is selected as the Security Type.
Press each one to open a keyboard to enter a 10-digit WEP Key.
Default Key:
This field is only enabled when WEP is selected as the Security Type. Press the
field to select which of the four WEP Keys is the default.
Current Key:
This field is only populated when WEP is selected as the Security Type.
Authentication:
This field is only enabled when WEP is selected as the Security Type. Press the
field to select between Shared and Open.
Cancel/Save:
Press Cancel to return to the Wireless Settings page without saving any
changes. Press Save to save all changes and return to the Wireless Settings
page.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
59
Setup Pages
FIG. 56 Wireless Security: Enterprise Mode
Wireless Security: Enterprise Mode
Security Type:
Pressing this field changes the security type being used between EAP-PEAP,
EAP-TTLS, EAP-TLS, EAP-LEAP, and EAP-FAST.
• EAP-PEAP security is designed for wireless environments where it is
necessary to securely transmit data over a wireless network. (Refer to the
EAP-PEAP Settings section on page 67 for details. For information on
uploading a certificate file, refer to the AMX Certificate Upload Utility section
on page 168.)
• EAP-TTLS security is designed for wireless environments where it is
necessary to first have a Radius server directly validate the identity of the
client (panel) before allowing it access to the network. (Refer to the EAPTTLS Settings section on page 68 for details. For information on uploading a
certificate file, refer to the AMX Certificate Upload Utility section on
page 168.)
• EAP-TLS security is designed for wireless environments where it is
necessary to securely transmit data over a wireless network by adding an
additional level of security protocol via the use of a private key. (Refer to the
EAP-TLS Settings section on page 70 for details. For information on
uploading a certificate file, refer to the AMX Certificate Upload Utility section
on page 168.)
• EAP-LEAP security is designed for wireless environments where it is not
required to have both a client or server certificate validation scheme in place,
yet necessary to securely transmit data over a wireless network. (Refer to the
EAP-LEAP Settings section on page 64 for details.)
• EAP-FAST security is designed for wireless environments where security
and ease of setup are equally desirable. (Refer to the EAP-FAST
Settings section on page 65 for details.)
60
SSID:
Press this field to enter a 32-character Network Name in the Network Name
keypad.
Identity:
Press this field to enter a Username in the Identity (Username) keypad.
Anon. Identity:
This field is only enabled when selecting EAP-TTLS and EAP-FAST as a
Security Type. Press this field to enter another Username in the Anonymous
Identity keypad.
Password:
Press this field to enter a password for wireless access in the Password
keypad. (NOTE: this field is greyed out when selecting EAP-TLS as a Security
Type.)
Certificate Authority:
Press this field to enter the file location for a Certificate Authority certificate in
the Certificate Authority (CA) keypad.
PEAP Version:
This field is only enabled when selecting EAP-PEAP as a Security Type. Press
this field to cycle between the available installed versions of PEAP.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Setup Pages
Wireless Security: Enterprise Mode (Cont.)
Inner Auth. Type:
This field is only enabled when selecting EAP-PEAP or EAP-TTLS as a
Security Type. Press this field to cycle between MSCHAPv2, GTC, OTP, and
MD5.
Client Certificate:
This field is only enabled when selecting EAP-TLS as a Security Type. Press
this field to enter a file location in the Client Certificate File Location keypad.
Private key:
This field is only enabled when selecting EAP-TLS as a Security Type. Press
this field to enter a file location in the Client Private Key File Location keypad.
Private Key Password:
This field is only enabled when selecting EAP-TLS as a Security Type. Press
this field to enter the password for the private key in the Private Key Password
keypad.
Auto PAC Provisioning:
This field is only enabled when selecting EAP-FAST as a Security Type. Press
this field to enable or disable the use of PAC files.
PAC File Location:
This field is only enabled when selecting EAP-FAST as a Security Type, and
only when Auto PAC Provisioning is Disabled. Press this field to enter a file
location in the PAC File Location keypad.
Auto Key Renewal:
This field is blocked out, but will read "NEVER" when selecting EAP-FAST as a
Security Type.
Cancel/Save:
Press the Cancel button to return to the Wireless Settings Page without saving
any changes. Press the Save button to save all changes and return to the
Wireless Settings Page.
Wireless Settings
The options on the Wireless Security: Simple Mode and Wireless Security: Enterprise Mode windows allow you to select
from the wireless security methods supported by the NXA-WC80211GCF Wi-Fi card. These security methods
incorporate WPA, WPA2, and EAP technology (some of which require the upload of unique certificate files to a target
panel).
Refer to the Appendix B - Wireless Technology section on page 163 for more further information.
Some encryption and security features may/may not be supported depending on the type of wireless card being used:
Wireless Security Support
802.11g Wi-Fi CF card: • Open (Clear Text)
• Static WEP (64-bit and 128-bit key lengths)
• WPA-PSK
• EAP security (with and without certificates)
• WAP SIte Survey
Refer to the Configuring a Wireless Network Access section on page 20 for more information on configuring the panel
for wireless network access using the various security options.
Open Settings
Open security does not utilize any encryption methodology, but requires an SSID (alpha-numeric) entry. This entry must
match the Network Name (SSID) entry of the target WAP so the panel knows what device it is using to communicate
with the network.
Open Settings
SSID (Service Set Identifier):
Opens an on-screen keyboard to enter the SSID name used on the target
WAP.
The SSID is a unique name used by the WAP, and is assigned to all panels
on that network. An SSID is required by the WAP before the panel is
permitted to join the network.
• The SSID is case sensitive and must not exceed 32 characters.
• Make sure this setting is the same for all points in your wireless network.
• NXA-WAP200Gs use AMX as their default SSID.
• If this field is left blank, the panel will attempt to connect to the first
available WAP.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
61
Setup Pages
Open Settings (Cont.)
Save/Cancel:
• Save - store the new security information, apply changes, and return to the
previous page.
• Cancel - discard changes and return to the previous page.
Refer to the Configuring a Wireless Network Access section on page 20 for further details on these security
options.
Refer to the Using the Site Survey tool section on page 22.
WEP Settings
WEP security requires that both a target WAP be identified and an encryption method be implemented prior to
establishing communication. In addition to providing both Open and Shared Authentication capabilities, this page also
supports Hexadecimal and ASCII keys.
WEP Settings
SSID (Service Set Identifier):
Opens an on-screen keyboard to enter the SSID name used on the target
WAP.
The SSID is a unique name used by the WAP, and is assigned to all panels
on that network. An SSID is required by the WAP before the panel is
permitted to join the network.
• The SSID is case sensitive and must not exceed 32 characters.
• Make sure this setting is the same for all points in your wireless network.
• NXA-WAP200Gs use AMX as their default SSID.
• If this field is left blank, the panel will attempt to connect to the first
available WAP.
WEP 64 / WEP 128:
Cycles through the available encryption options: 64 or 128 Bit Key Size.
“WEP” (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is an 802.11 security protocol designed to
provide wireless security equivalent to wired networks.
• WEP64 enables WEP encryption using a 64 Bit Key Size. All packets are
transmitted with their contents encrypted using the Default WEP Key.
• WEP128 enables WEP encryption using a 128 Bit Key Size. All packets
are transmitted with their contents encrypted using the Default WEP Key.
• If the key is not the correct size, the system will resize it to match the
number of bits required for the WEP encryption mode selected.
Generate (Passphrase):
This button displays an on-screen keyboard which allows you to enter a
passphrase. The panel then automatically generates four WEP keys
(compatible only with Modero panels). Enter these WEP keys into the target
WAP.
When working with multiple panels, WEP Keys must be entered into the WAP
for each panel.
• All Modero panels use the same code key generator. Therefore, this
Passphrase generates identical keys on any Modero panel.
• The Passphrase generator is case sensitive.
Note: This Key generator is unique to Modero panels and does not generate
the same keys as non-AMX wireless devices. For example, a Current Key
string generated anywhere else will not match those created on Modero
panels.
Default Key:
Cycles through the four available WEP key identifiers to select a WEP key to
use. As the Default Key value is altered (through selection) the corresponding
“Current Key” is displayed. Each Current Key corresponds to a WEP key.
This feature is useful for accessing different networks without having to
reenter that networks’ WEP key. It is also sometimes used to set up a rotating
key schedule to provide an extra layer of security.
62
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Setup Pages
WEP Settings (Cont.)
WEP Keys:
This feature provides another level of security by selecting up to four WEP
Keys.
Push any of the four buttons to open an on-screen keyboard. Both ASCII and
HEX keys are supported. Up to four keys can be configured for both.
• An ASCII key utilizes either 5 or 13 ASCII characters
• A HEX key utilizes either 10 or 26 Hexidecimal characters
Press Done to accept any changes and save the new value.
Note: A 64-bit key will be 10 characters in length while a 128-bit key will be
26 characters in length. The length of the key entered determines the level of
WEP encryption employed (64 or 128-bit). 128-bit keys may be used if
supported by the internal wireless card.
Current Key:
Displays the current WEP key in use.
• When working with a single panel and a single WAP, it is recommended
that you manually enter the Current Key from the WAP into the selected
WEP Key.
• When working with a single WAP and multiple panels, it is recommended
that you generate a Current Key using the same passphrase on all panels
and then enter the panel-produced WEP key manually into the Wireless
Access Point.
• Keys may also be examined by touching the key buttons and noting the
keyboard initialization text.
• Use the on-screen keyboard’s Clear button to erase stored key
information.
Authentication:
Toggles between the two authentication modes: Open + WEP (broadcast
publicly) or Shared + WEP (encrypted).
• An Open + WEP network allows connections from any client without
authentication.
• A Shared + WEP network requires the client to submit a key which is
shared by the network WAP before it is given permission to associate with
the network. In this case the key is the same as the WEP encryption key.
In either case, if WEP encryption has been enabled, the client will still require
the WEP key to encrypt and decrypt packets in order to communicate with the
network.
Save/Cancel:
• Save - store the new security information, apply changes, and return to the
previous page.
• Cancel - discard changes and return to the previous page.
Refer to the Configuring a Wireless Network Access section on page 20 for further details on these security
options.
Refer to the Using the Site Survey tool section on page 22 for more information on using this feature.
WPA-PSK Settings
WPA-PSK security is designed for environments where is it desirable to use WPA or WPA2, but an 802.1x
authentication server is not available. PSK connections are more secure than WEP and are simpler to configure since
they implement dynamic keys but share a key between the WAP and the panel (client).
Using WPA-PSK, the encryption on the WAP could either be WPA or WPA2. The firmware in the panel will
automatically connect to the WAP using the correct encryption. The WPA encryption type is configured on the WAP, not
in the firmware.
WAPs do not display “WPA” or “WPA2” on their configuration screens:
WPA is normally displayed as TKIP.
WPA2 is normally displayed as AES CCMP.
The following fields are required: SSID and Password/Pass Phrase.
Enter the SSID of the WAP.
Enter a pass phrase with a minimum of 8 characters and a maximum of 63.
The exact same pass phrase (including capitalization) must be entered in the access point.
Refer to the Configuring a Wireless Network Access section on page 20 for details on these security options.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
63
Setup Pages
WPA-PSK Settings
SSID (Service Set Identifier):
Opens an on-screen keyboard to enter the SSID name used on the target
WAP.
The SSID is a unique name used by the WAP, and is assigned to all panels
on that network. An SSID is required by the WAP before the panel is
permitted to join the network.
• The SSID is case sensitive and must not exceed 32 characters.
• Make sure this setting is the same for all points in your wireless network.
• NXA-WAP200Gs use AMX as their default SSID.
• If this field is left blank, the panel will attempt to connect to the first
available WAP.
Password:
Opens an on-screen keyboard to enter a passphrase (password).
• This alpha-numeric string must use a minimum of 8 characters and a
maximum of 63.
• The exact pass phrase string (including capitalization) must be entered on
the target WAP.
Save/Cancel:
• Save - store the new security information, apply changes, and return to the
previous page.
• Cancel - discard changes and return to the previous page.
Refer to the Using the Site Survey tool section on page 22 for more information on using this tool.
EAP-LEAP Settings
EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) is an Enterprise authentication protocol that can be used in both wired and
wireless network environments. EAP requires the use of an 802.1x Authentication Server, also known as a Radius server.
The configuration fields described below take variable length strings as inputs. An on-screen keyboard is opened when
these fields are selected.
LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) was developed to transmit authentication information securely
in a wireless network environment.
LEAP does not use client (panel) or server (RADIUS) certificates and is therefore one
of the least secure EAP security methods but can be utilized successfully by
implementing sufficiently complex passwords.
EAP-LEAP security is designed for wireless environments where it is not required to have a client or server certificate
validation scheme in place, yet necessary to transmit data securely over a wireless network.
EAP-LEAP Settings
SSID (Service Set Identifier):
Opens an on-screen keyboard to enter the SSID name used on the target
WAP.
The SSID is a unique name used by the WAP, and is assigned to all panels
on that network. An SSID is required by the WAP before the panel is
permitted to join the network.
• The SSID is case sensitive and must not exceed 32 characters.
• Make sure this setting is the same for all points in your wireless network.
• NXA-WAP200Gs use AMX as their default SSID.
• With EAP security, the SSID of the WAP must be entered. If it is left blank,
the panel will try to connect to the first access point detected that supports
EAP. However, a successful connection is not guaranteed because the
detected WAP may be connected to a RADIUS server, which may not
support this EAP type and/or have the proper user identities configured.
Identity:
Opens an on-screen keyboard. Enter an EAP Identity string (used by the
panel to identify itself to an Authentication (RADIUS) Server).
Note: This information is similar to a username used to login to a secured
server or workstation. This works in tandem with the Password string which is
similar to the password entered to gain access to a secured workstation.
Typically, this is in the form of a username such as: jdoe@amx.com.
64
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Setup Pages
EAP-LEAP Settings (Cont.)
Password:
Opens an on-screen keyboard. Enter the network password string specified
for the user entered within the Identity field (used by the panel to identify itself
to an Authentication (RADIUS) Server)
Note: This information is similar to the password entered to gain access to a
secured workstation.
Save/Cancel:
• Save - store the new security information, apply changes, and return to the
previous page.
• Cancel - discard changes and return to the previous page.
EAP-FAST Settings
EAP-FAST (Flexible Authentication via Secure Tunneling) security was designed for wireless environments where
security and ease of setup are equally desirable. EAP-FAST uses a certificate file, however it can be configured to
download the certificate automatically the first time the panel attempts to authenticate itself. Automatic certificate
downloading is convenient but slightly less secure, since its the certificate is transferred wirelessly and could
theoretically be “sniffed-out”.
EAP-FAST Settings
SSID (Service Set Identifier):
Opens an on-screen keyboard to enter the SSID name used on the target
WAP.
The SSID is a unique name used by the WAP, and is assigned to all panels
on that network. An SSID is required by the WAP before the panel is
permitted to join the network.
• The SSID is case sensitive and must not exceed 32 characters.
• Make sure this setting is the same for all points in your wireless network.
• NXA-WAP200Gs use AMX as their default SSID.
• With EAP security, the SSID of the WAP must be entered. If it is left blank,
the panel will try to connect to the first access point detected that supports
EAP. However, a successful connection is not guaranteed because the
detected WAP may be connected to a RADIUS server, which may not
support this EAP type and/or have the proper user identities configured.
Identity:
Opens an on-screen keyboard. Enter an EAP Identity string (used by the
panel to identify itself to an Authentication (RADIUS) Server).
Note: This information is similar to a username used to login to a secured
server or workstation. This works in tandem with the Password string which is
similar to the password entered to gain access to a secured workstation.
Typically, this is in the form of a username such as: jdoe@amx.com.
Anonymous Identity:
Opens an on-screen keyboard. Enter an IT provided alpha-numeric string
which (similar to the username) used as the identity, but that does not
represent a real user.
This information is used as a fictitious name which might be seen by sniffer
programs during the initial connection and setup process between the panel
and the Radius server. In this way the real identity (username) is protected.
Typically, this is in the form of a fictitious username such as:
anonymous@amx.com
Password:
Opens an on-screen keyboard. Enter the network password string specified
for the user entered within the Identity field (used by the panel to identify itself
to an Authentication (RADIUS) Server)
Note: This information is similar to the password entered to gain access to a
secured workstation.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
65
Setup Pages
EAP-FAST Settings (Cont.)
Automatic PAC
Provisioning:
This selection toggles PAC (Protected Access Credential) Provisioning Enabled (automatic) or Disabled (manual).
• If Enabled is selected, the following PAC File Location field is disabled,
because the search for the PAC file is done automatically.
• If Disabled is selected, the user is required to manually locate a file
containing the PAC shared secret credentials for use in authentication. In
this case, the IT department must create a PAC file and then transfer it into
the panel using the AMX Certificate Upload application.
Note: Even when automatic provisioning is enabled, the PAC certificate is
only downloaded the first time that the panel connects to the RADIUS server.
This file is then saved into the panel's file system and is then reused from
then on. It is possible for the user to change a setting (such as a new Identity)
that would invalidate this certificate.
In that case, the panel must be forced to download a new PAC file.
To do this, set Automatic PAC Provisioning to Disabled and then back to
Enabled. This forces the firmware to delete the old file and request a new
one.
PAC File Location:
This field is used when the previous Automatic PAC Provisioning option has
been Disabled.
• When pressed, the panel displays an on-screen PAC File Location
keyboard which allows you to enter the name of the file containing the PAC
shared secret credentials for use in authentication.
• This field is only valid when the automatic PAC provisioning feature has
been enabled via the previous field.
Save/Cancel:
• Save - store the new security information, apply changes, and return to the
previous page.
• Cancel - discard changes and return to the previous page.
Refer to the EAP Authentication section on page 166 for further details on these security options.
Refer to the Using the Site Survey tool section on page 22 for more information on using this feature.
66
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Setup Pages
EAP-PEAP Settings
PEAP (Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol) was developed as a way to securely transmit authentication
information, such as passwords, over a wireless network environment. PEAP uses only server-side public key certificates
and therefore does not need a client (panel) certificate which makes the configuration and setup easier.
There are two main versions of the PEAP protocol supported by panel’s DeviceScape Wireless Client:
PEAPv0
PEAPv1
PEAP uses inner authentication mechanisms supported by the DeviceScape Wireless Client, the most common of which
are:
MSCHAPv2 with PEAPv0
GTC with PEAPv1
EAP-PEAP security is designed for wireless environments where it is necessary to transmit data securely over a wireless
network.
EAP-PEAP Settings
SSID (Service Set Identifier):
Opens an on-screen keyboard to enter the SSID name used on the target
WAP. The SSID is a unique name used by the WAP, and is assigned to all
panels on that network. An SSID is required by the WAP before the panel is
permitted to join the network.
• The SSID is case sensitive and must not exceed 32 characters.
• Make sure this setting is the same for all points in your wireless network.
• NXA-WAP200Gs use AMX as their default SSID.
• With EAP security, the SSID of the WAP must be entered. If it is left blank,
the panel will try to connect to the first access point detected that supports
EAP. However, a successful connection is not guaranteed because the
detected WAP may be connected to a RADIUS server, which may not
support this EAP type and/or have the proper user identities configured.
Identity:
Opens an on-screen keyboard. Enter an EAP Identity string (used by the
panel to identify itself to an Authentication (RADIUS) Server).
Note: This information is similar to a username used to login to a secured
server or workstation. This works in tandem with the Password string which is
similar to the password entered to gain access to a secured workstation.
Typically, this is in the form of a username such as: jdoe@amx.com.
Password:
Opens an on-screen keyboard. Enter the network password string specified
for the user entered within the Identity field (used by the panel to identify itself
to an Authentication (RADIUS) Server)
Note: This information is similar to the password entered to gain access to a
secured workstation.
Certificate Authority:
When pressed, the panel displays an on-screen Certificate Authority (CA)
File Location keyboard which allows you to enter the name of the certificate
authority file which is used to validate the server certificate. This field is
optional.
If a server certificate is used, it should first be downloaded into the panel and
the Certificate Authority field should then be set to the name of that certificate
file. No file path should be used for this setting as all certificates are stored in
a specific directory that the user cannot control or change.
• Use the on-screen keyboard’s Clear button to completely erase any
previously stored network path information.
PEAP Version:
When pressed, this field cycles through the choices of available PEAP:
PEAPv0, PEAPv1, or PEAPv1 w/peaplabel=1.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
67
Setup Pages
EAP-PEAP Settings (Cont.)
Inner Authentication Type:
When pressed, this field cycles through the choices of available Inner
Authentication mechanisms supported by the Devicescape Secure Wireless
Client. The most commonly used are: MSCHAPv2 and GTC.
• MSCHAPv2 (used with PEAPv0)
• TLS
• GTC (used with PEAPv1)
• OTP
• MD5-Challenge
Save/Cancel:
• Save - store the new security information, apply changes, and return to the
previous page.
• Cancel - discard changes and return to the previous page.
Refer to the EAP Authentication section on page 166 for further details on these security options.
Refer to the Using the Site Survey tool section on page 22 for more information on using this feature.
EAP-TTLS Settings
TTLS (EAP Tunneled Transport Layer Security) is an authentication method that does not use a client certificate to
authenticate the panel. However. this method is more secure than PEAP because it does not broadcast the identity of the
user. Setup is similar to PEAP, but differs in the following areas:
An anonymous identity must be specified until the secure tunnel between the panel and the Radius server is
setup to transfer the real identity of the user.
There is no end-user ability to select from the different types of PEAP.
Additional Inner Authentication choices are available to the end-user.
EAP-TTLS security is designed for wireless environments where it is necessary to have the Radius server directly
validate the identity of the client (panel) before allowing it access to the network. This validation is done by tunneling a
connection through the WAP and directly between the panel and the Radius server. Once the client is identified and then
validated, the Radius server disconnects the tunnel and allows the panel to access the network directly via the target
WAP.
EAP-TTLS Settings
SSID (Service Set Identifier):
Opens an on-screen keyboard to enter the SSID name used on the target
WAP.
The SSID is a unique name used by the WAP, and is assigned to all panels
on that network. An SSID is required by the WAP before the panel is
permitted to join the network.
• The SSID is case sensitive and must not exceed 32 characters.
• Make sure this setting is the same for all points in your wireless network.
• NXA-WAP200Gs use AMX as their default SSID.
• With EAP security, the SSID of the WAP must be entered. If it is left blank,
the panel will try to connect to the first access point detected that supports
EAP. However, a successful connection is not guaranteed because the
detected WAP may be connected to a RADIUS server, which may not
support this EAP type and/or have the proper user identities configured.
Identity:
Opens an on-screen keyboard. Enter an EAP Identity string (used by the
panel to identify itself to an Authentication (RADIUS) Server).
Note: This information is similar to a username used to login to a secured
server or workstation. This works in tandem with the Password string which is
similar to the password entered to gain access to a secured workstation.
Typically, this is in the form of a username such as: jdoe@amx.com.
Anonymous Identity:
Opens an on-screen keyboard. Enter an IT provided alpha-numeric string
which (similar to the username) used as the identity, but that does not
represent a real user.
This information is used as a fictitious name which might be seen by sniffer
programs during the initial connection and setup process between the panel
and the Radius server. In this way the real identity (username) is protected.
Typically, this is in the form of a fictitious username such as:
anonymous@amx.com
68
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Setup Pages
EAP-TTLS Settings (Cont.)
Password:
Opens an on-screen keyboard. Enter the network password string specified
for the user entered within the Identity field (used by the panel to identify itself
to an Authentication (RADIUS) Server)
Note: This information is similar to the password entered to gain access to a
secured workstation.
Certificate Authority:
When pressed, the panel displays an on-screen Certificate Authority (CA)
File Location keyboard which allows you to enter the name of the certificate
authority file which is used to validate the server certificate.
This field is optional.
If a server certificate is used, it should first be downloaded into the panel and
the Certificate Authority field should then be set to the name of that certificate
file. No file path should be used for this setting as all certificates are stored in
a specific directory that the user cannot control or change.
• Use the on-screen keyboard’s Clear button to completely erase any
previously stored network path information.
Inner Authentication Type:
When pressed, this field cycles through the choices of available Inner
Authentication mechanism supported by the Devicescape Secure Wireless
Client:
• MSCHAPv2 (default because its the most common)
• MSCHAP
• PAP
• CHAP
• EAP-MSCHAPv2
• EAP-GTC
• EAP-OTP
• EAP-MD5-Challenge
Save/Cancel:
• Save - store the new security information, apply changes, and return to the
previous page.
• Cancel - discard changes and return to the previous page.
Refer to the EAP Authentication section on page 166 for further details on these security options.
Refer to the Using the Site Survey tool section on page 22 for more information on using this feature.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
69
Setup Pages
EAP-TLS Settings
TLS (Transport Layer Security) was the original standard wireless LAN EAP authentication protocol. TLS requires
additional work during the deployment phase but provides additional security since even a compromised password is not
enough to break into an EAP-TLS protected wireless network environment.
EAP-TLS security is designed for wireless environments where it is necessary to securely transmit data over a wireless
network by adding an additional level of security protocol via the use of a private key.
EAP-TLS Settings
SSID (Service Set Identifier):
Opens an on-screen keyboard to enter the SSID name used on the target
WAP.
The SSID is a unique name used by the WAP, and is assigned to all panels
on that network. An SSID is required by the WAP before the panel is
permitted to join the network.
• The SSID is case sensitive and must not exceed 32 characters.
• Make sure this setting is the same for all points in your wireless network.
• NXA-WAP200Gs use AMX as their default SSID.
• With EAP security, the SSID of the WAP must be entered. If it is left blank,
the panel will try to connect to the first access point detected that supports
EAP. However, a successful connection is not guaranteed because the
detected WAP may be connected to a RADIUS server, which may not
support this EAP type and/or have the proper user identities configured.
Identity:
Opens an on-screen keyboard. Enter an EAP Identity string (used by the
panel to identify itself to an Authentication (RADIUS) Server).
Note: This information is similar to a username used to login to a secured
server or workstation. This works in tandem with the Password string which is
similar to the password entered to gain access to a secured workstation.
Typically, this is in the form of a username such as: jdoe@amx.com.
Certificate Authority:
When pressed, the panel displays an on-screen Certificate Authority (CA)
File Location keyboard which allows you to enter the name of the certificate
authority file which is used to validate the server certificate.
This field is optional.
If a server certificate is used, it should first be downloaded into the panel and
the Certificate Authority field should then be set to the name of that certificate
file. No file path should be used for this setting as all certificates are stored in
a specific directory that the user cannot control or change.
• Use the on-screen keyboard’s Clear button to completely erase any
previously stored network path information.
Client Certificate:
Opens an on-screen keyboard. Enter the name of the file containing the client
(panel) certificate for use in certifying the identity of the client (panel).
• Refer to the Client certificate configuration section for information
regarding Client Certificates and their parameters.
Private Key:
When pressed, the panel displays an on-screen Client Private Key File
Location keyboard which allows you to enter the name of the file containing
the private key.
• Use the on-screen keyboard’s Clear button to completely erase any
previously stored network path information.
Private Key password:
This field should only be used if the Private Key is protected with a password.
If there is no password protection associated with the Private Key, then this
field should be left blank.
• When pressed, the panel displays an on-screen Private Key Password
keyboard which allows you to enter an alpha-numeric password string.
• Use the on-screen keyboard’s Clear button to completely erase any
previously stored network path information.
Save/Cancel:
• Save - store the new security information, apply changes, and return to the
previous page.
• Cancel - discard changes and return to the previous page.
Refer to the EAP Authentication section on page 166 for further details on these security options.
70
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Setup Pages
Refer to the Using the Site Survey tool section on page 22 for more information on using this feature.
Client certificate configuration
There are several ways in which a client certificate can be configured by an IT department. The client certificate and
private key can both be incorporated into one file or split into two separate files. In addition, the file format used by these
files could be PEM, DER, or PKCS12. These formats are described later in this section. The following table describes
how to fill in the fields for each possible case.
Client Certificate Configuration
Certificate Configuration
Client Certificate Field Private Key Field
Single file contains both the client certificate and
the private key. Format is: PEM or DER.
Enter the file name
Enter the same file name
First file contains the client certificate, second file
contains the private key. Format is: PEM or DER.
Enter the first file name
Enter the second file name
Single file contains both the client certificate and
the private key. Format is: PKCS12
Leave this field blank
Enter the file name
First file contains the client certificate, second file
contains the private key. Format is: PKCS12
not supported
not supported
AMX supports the following security certificates
PEM (Privacy Enhanced Mail)
DER (Distinguished Encoding Rules)
PKCS12 (Public Key Cryptography Standard #12)
PKCS12 files are frequently generated by Microsoft certificate applications.
Otherwise, PEM is more common.
Certificate files frequently use 5 file extensions. It can be confusing because there is not a one to one correspondence.
The following table shows the possible file extension used for each certificate type:
Certificates and their Extensions
Certificate Type
PEM
Possible File Extensions
.cer
.pem
.pvk
DER
.cer
.der
PKCS12
.pfx
It is important to note which certificate types are supported by the different certificate fields used on the configuration
screens (PEAP, TTLS, and TLS). The following table outlines the firmware fields and their supported certificate types.
Certificate Types Supported by the Modero Firmware
Configuration Field Name Certificate File Type Supported
Certificate Authority field
PEM and DER
Client Certificate field
PEM and DER
Private Key field
.PEM, DER, and PKCS12
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
71
Setup Pages
Calibration Page
This page (FIG. 57) allows you to calibrate the touch panel for accurate button selection.
FIG. 57 Calibration Page
Press and hold the two lower button on both sides of the display for 6 seconds to access the Calibration page
(see FIG. 88 on page 155).
Press the crosshairs to calibrate the panel and return to the previous page.
Always calibrate the panel before its initial use, and after downloading new firmware.
In cases where the touch panel calibration is off to a degree that makes it difficult or
impossible to navigate to this page, you can access it via G4 WebControl, so you can
re-calibrate the panel.
72
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Setup Pages
G4 Web Control Settings/G4 Web Control Page
An on-board VNC (Virtual Network Computing) server allows the panel to connect to any remote PC running a VNC
client. Once connected, the client can view and control the panel remotely. The options on the MVP-7500 G4 Web
Control Settings page (FIG. 58) and the MVP-8400 Web Control page (FIG. 59) allow you to enable/disable G4 Web
Control functionality.
FIG. 58 G4 Web Control Settings Page (MVP-7500)
FIG. 59 G4 Web Control Page (MVP-8400)
Features on this page include:
G4 Web Control Page
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired
(image of three networked computers).
Connection Status icon:
The icon in the upper-right corner of each Setup page shows online/offline state
of the panel to the master.
• Bright red - disconnected
• Bright green - connected. Blinks when a blink message is received to dark
green every 5 seconds for half a second then go back to bright green.
• Bright yellow - panel missed a blink message from the master. It will remain
yellow for 3 missed blink messages and then turn red. It will return to green
when a blink message is received.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
73
Setup Pages
G4 Web Control Page (Cont.)
G4 Web Control Settings:
Enable/Enabled
Sets the IP communication values for the touch panel:
The Enable/Enabled button allows you to toggle between the two G4 activation
settings:
• Enable - deactivates G4 Web Control on the panel.
• Enabled - activates G4 Web Control on the panel.
Network Interface Select
Displays “Wireless” when the panel is communicating via a Wireless Access
Point (WAP).
Web Control Name
Use this field to enter a unique alpha-numeric string to be used as the panel’s
display name within the Manage WebControl Connections window of the
NetLinx Security browser window.
Web Control Password
Use this field to enter the G4 Authentication session password required for
VNC access to the panel.
Web Control Port
Enter the number of the port used by the VNC Web Server. Default = 5900.
Maximum Number of
Connections
Displays the maximum number of users that can be simultaneously connected
to this panel via VNC. Default = 1.
Current Connection Count
G4 Web Control Timeout:
Displays the number of users currently connected to this panel via VNC.
Sets the length of time (in minutes) that the panel can remain idle (no cursor
movements) before the G4 Web Control session is terminated.
• Minimum value = 0 minutes (panel never times out)
• Maximum value = 240 minutes (panel times out after 240 minutes)
Refer to the Using G4 Web Control to Interact with a G4 Panel section on page 35 for
instructions on using the G4 Web Control page with the web-based NetLinx Security
application.
Other Settings
The Other Settings button (FIG. 60 and FIG. 61) provides a menu to select the Cache Settings/Cache Setup page,
Password Setup page, or SIP Settings page (MVP-8400 only). Select any option to access its page.
FIG. 60 Other Settings Menu (MVP-7500)
FIG. 61 Other Settings menu (MVP-8400)
74
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Setup Pages
Cache Settings/Cache Setup Page
The Cache Settings page (MVP-7500, FIG. 62) and Cache Setup page (MVP-8400, FIG. 63) configures the allocation of
memory for image caching. The G4 graphics engine caches images to decrease load time of previously viewed images.
RAM caching is always enabled, and images (both static and dynamic) are stored in the RAM cache as they are viewed.
The size of RAM cache is automatically configured to take into account available memory versus memory that may be
needed by the panel later. As the RAM cache approaches its maximum size, the oldest items in the cache may be
discarded to make room for newer items. If Flash caching is enabled, dynamic images that would have been discarded
will be moved to Flash, since it is typically faster to retrieve images on Flash than across a network (although it is slower
than RAM cache). Note that since static images are already stored on Flash, they are never moved to the Flash cache, so
Flash caching applies only to dynamic images. Images in Flash cache are moved back to RAM cache the next time they
are viewed. As the Flash cache approaches its maximum size, the least recently used items may be discarded to make
room for new items.
Flash memory may be allocated for image caching, but RAM cache is always enabled. Flash memory is a secondary
cache and is much slower than RAM cache, as it uses Compact Flash to store images. Flash memory should not be used
frequently, but it may be appropriate to use Flash memory in some environments that are dynamic image intensive, at
times when RAM cache is easily exhausted and the time taken to access Flash memory would be faster than network
latency. For example, when large dynamic images are being used over slow wireless links, putting the images into Flash
memory can help the situation, as the panel could spend more resources processing information rather than continuously
waiting on images to arrive from a slow network.
FIG. 62 Cache Settings Page (MVP-7500)
FIG. 63 Cache Setup Page (MVP-8400)
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
75
Setup Pages
The elements of this page include:
Cache Settings/Cache Setup Page Elements
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired
(image of three networked computers).
Connection Status icon:
The icon in the upper-right corner of each Setup page shows online/offline state
of the panel to the master.
• Bright red - disconnected
• Bright green - connected. Blinks when a blink message is received to dark
green every 5 seconds for half a second then go back to bright green.
• Bright yellow - panel missed a blink message from the master. It will remain
yellow for 3 missed blink messages and then turn red. It will return to green
when a blink message is received.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
Image Cache Settings:
Allocates Flash memory for image caching.
Flash Cache Size
Press the Up and Down arrows to add and remove memory. Flash memory
allocation cannot exceed the amount of Flash memory on the panel.
Flash/RAM Cache Expires
Press the Up and Down arrows to change the amount of time the images stay
in cache memory. The options are:
• Never
• 2 Hours
• 8 Hours
• 1 Day
• 2 Days
• 5 Days
Enable:
Press this button to toggle the image Flash cache option On and Off.
Clear Cache:
Press this button to clear both the Flash and RAM cache of all stored images.
Image Cache Status:
The status of the memory available versus in use.
RAM Max Size
The maximum amount of memory available for all image caching.
RAM Current Size
The memory that is currently in use for caching static and dynamic images.
RAM Hit Rate
The percentage of image requests (static and dynamic) satisfied by accessing
the cache.
100 * (# of cache hits) / (# of cache hits + # of cache misses)
# of cache hits - the number of times an image was requested that the image
was found in the cache. If your hit rate is low, you may want to consider
enabling Flash cache.
# of cache misses - the number of times an image was requested that the
image could not be found in the cache, and the image had to either be loaded
from flash or obtained via the network (for dynamic images). It is considered a
RAM Cache Miss even if the image is subsequently found in flash cache.
Items in Cache (RAM)
The number of images that are currently stored in the RAM cache.
Flash Current Size
The maximum flash space allocated for image caching. Flash space is used for
caching only when there is not enough available memory in the RAM cache for
a newly requested image (it is used only for dynamic images).
Flash Hit Rate
The percentage of image requests (dynamic only) that are satisfied by
accessing the flash cache.
100 * (# of flash cache hits) / (# of flash cache hits + # of flash cache misses)
# of flash cache hits - # of times a dynamic image could not be found in RAM
cache but was found in flash cache
# of flash cache misses - # of times a dynamic image could not be found in
either RAM or flash cache. RAM cache hits are not relevant in this calculation.
Items in Cache (Flash)
76
The number of images that are currently stored in the Flash cache.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Setup Pages
Setting the image cache
In the Protected Setup page:
1. Press the Cache button in the Protected Setup Navigation Buttons section. This opens the Cache Settings/Cache
Setup page.
2. Set the cache expiration in the field Flash/RAM Cache Expires. The Up and Down arrows increment through the
available time frames.
3. Press the Enable button to turn on image caching. The button appears illuminated when enabled.
Select the Up and Down arrows for the field Flash Cache Size to increase or reduce the amount of Flash memory used;
the maximum amount of flash that can be allocated for caching is 75% of available flash.
Clearing the image cache
In the Protected Setup page:
1. Press the Cache button in the Protected Setup Navigation Buttons section. This opens the Cache Settings/Cache
Setup page.
2. Press Clear Cache. This clears all image cache currently stored on the panel (both Flash and RAM).
Checking image cache status
In the Protected Setup page:
Press the Cache button in the Protected Setup Navigation Buttons section. This opens the Cache Settings/Cache Setup
page. All status information is located in the Image Cache Status section of the page.
Password Setup Page
The options on the Password Setup page enable you to assign the passwords required for users to access the Protected
Setup page, and to release the MVP from a MVP-TDS or MVP-WDS docking station (FIG. 64).
FIG. 64 Password Setup page (MVP-8400)
Features on this page include:
Password Setup Page
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired
(image of three networked computers).
In Panel Password
Change:
Accesses the alphanumeric values associated to particular password sets.
• The PASSWORD 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 (protected) buttons open a keyboard to
enter alphanumeric values associated to the selected password group.
Note: Clearing Password #5 removes the need to enter a password before
accessing the Protected Setup page.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
77
Setup Pages
Password Setup Page (Cont.)
User Access:
Use these buttons to access and modify the user name/password combinations
required for removing the panel from a docking station. The number of user
access passwords on the panel is limited only by the amount of storage
memory available.
Use the UP/DN buttons to scroll through the list of saved User Access user
names and passwords.
The Enable/Enabled button allows you to toggle between activating or
deactivating the MVP panel requirement of a user to enter a pre-defined
password before removing the panel from a connected docking station:
• Enable - does not prompt the user for a password, the docking station just
releases the panel when the security release pushbutton is pressed.
• Enabled - requires that a valid password from the User Access list be
entered before removing a panel from a docking station.
• The Report button enables/disables reporting the panel’s docking status to
the Master.
SIP Settings Page (MVP-8400 only)
The options on the SIP Settings page for the MVP-8400 (FIG. 65) enable you to establish network settings for using your
touch panel as an IP phone. With a CSG SIP Communications Gateway (FG2182-01, -02, -03), you can use your touch
panel to make and receive local, long distance, and international phone calls, and have access to phone features like call
waiting, caller ID, call forwarding, call queuing, and voice mail. Setting up your touch panel as a telephone requires that
you set it up as one in the CSG SIP Communications Gateway. Refer to the CSG SIP Communications Gateway
Operation/Reference Guide for information on setting up your touch panel to work as a telephone.
You may need to load a Duet module to enable the touch panel to receive SIP calls. The Duet module translates between
the standard interface and the device protocol. It parses the buffer for responses from the device, sends strings to control
the device, and receives commands from the UI module or telnet sessions. Refer to the documentation supplied with the
Duet Module for more details.
A sample UI module is provided in the module package. It is not intended to cover
every possible application, but can be expanded as needed by a dealer to meet the
requirements of a particular installation.
FIG. 65 SIP Settings Page (MVP-8400 only)
78
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Setup Pages
Features on this page include:
SIP Settings Page
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired
(image of three networked computers).
Connection Status icon:
The icon in the upper-right corner of each Setup page shows online/offline state
of the panel to the master.
• Bright red - disconnected
• Bright green - connected. Blinks when a blink message is received to dark
green every 5 seconds for half a second then go back to bright green.
• Bright yellow - panel missed a blink message from the master. It will remain
yellow for 3 missed blink messages and then turn red. It will return to green
when a blink message is received.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
Status:
This option enables the SIP Stack on startup. If you disable this option, the
panel will not attempt to read the rest of the configuration and will not register
with a proxy server. However, point-to-point SIP will still be enabled allowing for
existing intercom functionality.
Connection State:
This option displays whether you are connected to the proxy server.
Proxy Address:
This option enables you to enter the IP address or DNS name of the proxy
server that you want to use to register.
Port Number:
The option displays the port you use to connect to the proxy server. The
standard SIP port is 5060, but some providers use different ports.
STUN Address:
This option enables you to enter the IP address or DNS name of the Simple
Traversal of UDP through NATs (STUN) server. This field is optional.
Local Domain:
This is the realm used for authentication. This field is optional.
User Name:
This option enables you to enter the user name used for authentication to the
proxy server. The user name must match an extension defined in the SIP
Gateway to "register" the panel so it can receive calls. Normally, the user name
is the same as the phone number assigned to the extension you are using. This
field is required.
Password:
This option enables you to enter the password for the user at the proxy server.
This field is optional.
Tools
The Tools button(FIG. 66 and FIG. 67) provides a menu to select either the Panel Connection Logs/Panel Logs
Page section on page 80, the Panel Statistics Page section on page 81, or the Connection Utility Page section on page 83.
Select any of the options to access that page.
FIG. 66 Tools menu (MVP-7500)
FIG. 67 Tools menu (MVP-8400)
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
79
Setup Pages
Panel Connection Logs/Panel Logs Page
The options on the Panel Connection Logs page (FIG. 68) and the Panel Logs page (FIG. 69) allow you to view and track
the connection history of the panel.
FIG. 68 Panel Connection Logs (MVP-7500)
FIG. 69 Panel Logs page (MVP-8400)
Features on this page include:
Panel Logs Page
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired
(image of three networked computers).
Connection Status icon:
The icon in the upper-right corner of each Setup page shows online/offline state
of the panel to the master.
• Bright red - disconnected
• Bright green - connected. Blinks when a blink message is received to dark
green every 5 seconds for half a second then go back to bright green.
• Bright yellow - panel missed a blink message from the master. It will remain
yellow for 3 missed blink messages and then turn red. It will return to green
when a blink message is received.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
80
Connection Logs
A history of all connections, attempts, and failures for the panel.
Clear
Clears the Connection Logs history.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Setup Pages
Panel Logs Page (Cont.)
Refresh
Refreshes the Connection Logs history.
Page
Indicates the current page of the Connection Logs.
Use the Up and Down arrows to move from one page to the next.
Checking the Panel Connection Logs
1. Press the Tools button in the Protected Setup Navigation Buttons section. This opens the Tools menu.
2. Within the Tools menu, press the Panel Logs button. All connection data is contained in the section Connection
Logs.
Refreshing the Panel Connections Log
1. Press the Tools button in the Protected Setup Navigation Buttons section. This opens the Tools menu.
2. Within the Tools menu, press the Panel Logs button.
3. Push the Refresh button.
Clearing the Panel Connections Log
1. Press the Tools button in the Protected Setup Navigation Buttons section. This opens the Tools menu.
2. Within the Tools menu, press the Panel Logs button.
3. Push the Clear button.
4. Confirm your selection.
Panel Statistics Page
The options on the Panel Statistics page (FIG. 70 and FIG. 71) allow you to track the connection status for the panel. The
Panel Statistics page tracks ICSP messages, Blink messages, Ethernet connection statistics, and Wireless connection
statistics.
FIG. 70 Panel Statistics Page (MVP-7500)
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
81
Setup Pages
FIG. 71 Panel Statistics page (MVP-8400)
Features on this page include:
Panel Statistics Page
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired (image of
three networked computers).
Connection Status icon: The icon in the upper-right corner of each Setup page shows online/offline state of
the panel to the master.
• Bright red - disconnected
• Bright green - connected. Blinks when a blink message is received to dark green
every 5 seconds for half a second then go back to bright green.
• Bright yellow - panel missed a blink message from the master. It will remain
yellow for 3 missed blink messages and then turn red. It will return to green
when a blink message is received.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
ICSP Messages
Total
Messages sent between the master and the touch panel; it is the protocol they use
to communicate to each other.
• Received - The total ICSP messages received by the panel.
• Processed - The total ICSP messages processed by the panel.
• Dropped - The total ICSP messages dropped by the panel.
Last 15 Minutes
• Received - The total ICSP messages received by the panel in the last 15
minutes.
• Processed - The total ICSP messages processed by the panel in the last 15
minutes.
• Dropped - The total ICSP messages dropped by the panel in the last 15
minutes.
Blink Messages
Total
The master sends this message once every 5 seconds to all connected devices.
• Received - The total Blink messages received by the panel.
• Missed - The total Blink messages missed by the panel.
Last 15 Minutes
• Received - The total Blink messages received by the panel in the last 15
minutes.
• Missed - The total Blink messages missed by the panel in the last 15 minutes.
82
Ethernet Statistics
The Ethernet connection statistics for the panel.
Wireless Statistics
The Wireless connection statistics for the panel.
Clear
Clears all panel connection statistics.
Refresh
Refreshes all panel connection statistics.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Setup Pages
Checking the Panel Statistics
1. Press the Tools button in the Protected Setup Navigation Buttons section. This opens the Tools menu.
2. Within the Tools menu, press the Panel Statistics button. All connection statistics are contained on this page, e.g.,
Received, Processed, and Dropped ICSP Messages.
Refreshing the Panel Statistics
1. Press the Tools button in the Protected Setup Navigation Buttons section. This opens the Tools menu.
2. Within the Tools menu, press the Panel Statistics button.
3. Push the Refresh button.
Clearing the Panel Statistics
1. Press the Tools button in the Protected Setup Navigation Buttons section. This opens the Tools menu.
2. Within the Tools menu, press the Panel Statistics button.
3. Push the Clear button.
4. Confirm your selection.
Connection Utility Page
The options on the Connection Utility page (FIG. 72 and FIG. 73) allow you to utilize your panel as a site survey tool.
While in this page, move around your wireless network coverage area and see if there are any weak points within the
spaces between your WAPs
FIG. 72 Connection Utility Page (MVP-7500)
FIG. 73 Connection Utility Page (MVP-8400)
Features on this page include:
Connection Utility Page
Close:
Closes the Connection Utility popup.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired
(image of three networked computers).
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
83
Setup Pages
Connection Utility Page (Cont.)
Connection Status icon:
The icon in the upper-right corner of each Setup page shows online/offline state
of the panel to the master.
• Bright red - disconnected
• Bright green - connected. Blinks when a blink message is received to dark
green every 5 seconds for half a second then go back to bright green.
• Bright yellow - panel missed a blink message from the master. It will remain
yellow for 3 missed blink messages and then turn red. It will return to green
when a blink message is received.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
Connection Information
Master IP
The IP Address for the connected master.
Panel IP
The IP Address for the panel.
Wireless Information
WAP MAC
The MAC Address for the WAP currently in use.
If the MAC Address changes, it means the panel has switched/roamed to a
different access point. This can be used to determine coverage for each access
point and help isolate "brown" areas where coverage is minimal or non-existent,
and thus require another access installed.
SSID
Displays the currently used SSID of the target WAP.
Channel
The RF channel being used for connection to the WAP (read -only).
Signal Level Value
(MVP-7500)
The value of the outgoing signal in dBm.
Data Rate (MVP-8400)
The data rate (in Mbps) at which the panel is currently communicating with the
target WAP.
Note: Data rates for 802.11b communication are: 1, 2, 5.5, and 11 Mbps.
Signal Level (MVP-7500)
A bar display showing the current signal strength.
Link Quality (MVP-8400)
Displays the quality of the link from the wireless NIC to the Wireless Access
Point (direct sequence spread spectrum) in real time (None, Poor, Fair, Good,
Very Good, and Excellent).
• Even when link quality is at its lowest you still have a connection, and the
ability to transmit and receive data, even if at lower speeds.
Note: “Link Quality” and “Signal Strength” are applicable to RF connections
only. It is possible to have an RF signal to a WAP, but be unable to
communicate with it because of either incorrect IP or encryption settings.
Signal Strength
(MVP-8400)
This indicator displays a description of the signal strength from the Wireless
Access Point connection in real time (None, Poor, Fair, Good, Very Good, and
Excellent).
SNR (Signal Noise Ratio) is a measure of the relative strength of a wireless RF
connection. Given this value and the link quality above, you can determine the
noise level component of the SNR. For example, if signal strength is high but
the link quality is low, then the cause of the link degradation is noise. However,
if signal strength is low and link quality is low the cause would simply be signal
strength.
Connection Statistics
Query Messages Sent
84
The number of messages sent from the panel to the master.
Responses Received
The number of responses the panel has received from the master.
Responses Missed
The number of expected responses from the master to the panel missed.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Setup Pages
Using the Connection Utility
1. Press the Tools button in the Protected Setup Navigation Buttons section. This opens the Tools menu.
2. Within the Tools menu, press the Connection Utility button. This launches the Connection Utility popup.
3. Move the panel throughout your wireless network, and changes within the utility. The Connection Information
notes the IP of the connected master and the IP of your panel. The Wireless Information indicates the current
wireless connection method for the panel, e.g., the MAC Address for the WAP currently in use. The Connection
Statistics show the current quality of the panel connection.
4. Push Close when you are done using the site survey tool.
Information
The Information button (FIG. 74 and FIG. 75) provides a menu to select either the Project Information Page section on
page 85 or the Panel Information Page section on page 87. Select either option to access that page.
FIG. 74 Information Menu (MVP-7500)
FIG. 75 Information Menu (MVP-8400)
Project Information Page
The Project Information page (FIG. 76 and FIG. 77) displays the project properties of the TPDesign4 project file
currently loaded on the panel.
FIG. 76 Project Information Page (MVP-7500)
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
85
Setup Pages
FIG. 77 Project Information page (MVP-8400) and corresponding TPD4 project properties tabs
Features on this page include:
Project Information Page
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired (image of
three networked computers).
Connection Status icon: The icon in the upper-right corner of each Setup page shows online/offline state of
the panel to the master.
• Bright red - disconnected
• Bright green - connected. Blinks when a blink message is received to dark green
every 5 seconds for half a second then go back to bright green.
• Bright yellow - panel missed a blink message from the master. It will remain
yellow for 3 missed blink messages and then turn red. It will return to green
when a blink message is received.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
86
File Name:
Displays the name of the TPDesign4 project file downloaded to the panel.
Designer ID:
Displays the designer information.
File Revision:
Displays the revision number of the file.
Dealer ID:
Displays the dealer ID number (unique to every dealer and entered in TPD4).
Job Name:
Displays the job name.
Sales Order:
Displays the sales order information.
Purchase Order:
Displays the purchase order information.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Setup Pages
Project Information Page (Cont.)
AMX IR 38K Port:
Displays the AMX 38 kHz IR channel port used by the IR Emitter on the panel.
• This information is specified in TPD4 (Project Properties > IR Emitters &
Receivers tab).
• For example if you set the AMX IR 38K Port to 7 and then put a button on the
panel with a channel code of 5 and a port of 7, it will trigger the IR code in slot 5
of the AMX IR 38K Port.
AMX IR 455K Port:
Displays the AMX 455 kHz IR channel port used by the IR Emitter on the panel.
IR User Def 1 Port:
Displays the User Defined IR channel port used by the IR Emitter on the panel.
• Note: User Defined ports can be downloaded by the user and are customizable,
whereas the AMX ones are fixed.
IR User Def 2 Port:
Displays the User Defined IR channel port used by the IR Emitter on the panel.
Build Number:
Displays the build number information of the TPD4 software used to create the
project file.
Creation Date:
Displays the project creation date.
Revision Date:
Displays the last revision date for the project.
Last Save Date:
Displays the last date the project was saved.
Blink Rate:
Displays the feedback blink rate, in .10 second increments.
Job Comments:
Displays any comments associated to the job (from the TPD4 project file).
Cradle Sensor Port:
Displays the port assignment being used to report Cradle Sensor information.
Cradle Sensor Channel: Displays the channel assignment being used to report Cradle Sensor information.
The channel is turned on when the panel is docked (in either the TDS or WDS
docking stations.
IR receivers and transmitters on G4 panels share the device address number of the
panel.
Panel Information Page
The Panel Information page (FIG. 78 and FIG. 79) provides detailed panel information.
FIG. 78 Panel Information Page (MVP-7500)
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
87
Setup Pages
FIG. 79 Panel Information Page (MVP-8400)
Features on this page include:
Panel Information Page
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired
(image of three networked computers).
Connection Status icon:
The icon in the upper-right corner of each Setup page shows online/offline state
of the panel to the master.
• Bright red - disconnected
• Bright green - connected. Blinks when a blink message is received to dark
green every 5 seconds for half a second then go back to bright green.
• Bright yellow - panel missed a blink message from the master. It will remain
yellow for 3 missed blink messages and then turn red. It will return to green
when a blink message is received.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
Panel Type:
Displays the model of the panel being used.
Firmware Version:
Displays the version number of the G4 firmware loaded on the panel.
Setup Port:
Displays the setup port information (value) being used by the panel.
High Port:
Displays the high port (port count) value for the panel.
High Address:
Displays the high address (address count) value for the panel.
High Channel:
Displays the high channel (channel count) value for the panel.
High Level:
Displays the high level (level count) value being used by the panel.
Serial Number:
Displays the specific serial number value assigned to the panel.
Setup Pages Version:
Displays the type and version of the Setup pages being used by the panel.
Screen Width:
Displays the screen width (in pixels).
• MVP-8400 = 800
Screen Height:
Displays the screen height (in pixels).
• MVP-8400 = 600 pixels.
88
Screen Refresh Rate:
Displays the video refresh rate applied to the incoming video signal from the
panel.
Screen Rotation:
Displays the degree of rotation applied to the on-screen image.
Power Up Pages:
Displays the page assigned to display after the panel is powered-up.
Start Up String:
Displays the start-up string.
Wake Up String:
Displays the wake up string used after an activation from a timeout.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Setup Pages
Panel Information Page (Cont.)
Sleep String:
Displays the sleep string used during a panel’s sleep mode.
File System:
Displays the amount of Compact Flash memory available on the panel.
RAM:
Displays the available RAM (or Extended Memory module) on the panel.
Panel Start Time:
Displays the last time the panel booted.
Time & Date Setup
The options on the Time & Date Setup page (FIG. 80 and FIG. 81) allow you to set and adjust time and date information
on the NetLinx Master. If the time and/or date on the Master is modified, all connected devices will be updated to reflect
the new information.
FIG. 80 Time & Date Settings Page (MVP-7500)
FIG. 81 Time and Date Setup Page (MVP-8400)
MVP touch panels do not have an on-board clock; the only way to modify a panel’s
time without altering the Master is via NetLinx Code.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
89
Setup Pages
Features on this page include:
Time & Date Setup Page
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired (image of
three networked computers).
Connection Status icon: The icon in the upper-right corner of each Setup page shows online/offline state of
the panel to the master.
• Bright red - disconnected
• Bright green - connected. Blinks when a blink message is received to dark green
every 5 seconds for half a second then go back to bright green.
• Bright yellow - panel missed a blink message from the master. It will remain
yellow for 3 missed blink messages and then turn red. It will return to green
when a blink message is received.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
Time Date Refresh/Set:
This section provides two options:
• The Get Time/Date button retrieves Time and Date information from the Master.
• The Set Time/Date button sets the Master to retain and save any time/date
modifications made on the panel.
Time Display fields:
• These fields display the time in three formats: STANDARD, STANDARD AM/
PM, and 24 HOUR.
Date Display fields:
• These fields display the calendar date information in several different formats.
Set Date/Time:
Use the UP/DN arrow buttons to adjust the Master’s calendar date and time. The
blue icon indicates which field is currently selected (see FIG. 81).
• Year range = 2000 - 2037
• Month range = 1 - 12
• Day range = 1 - 31
• Hour = 24-hour military
• Minute range = 0 - 59
• Second range = 0 - 59
90
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Setup Pages
Audio Settings
The MVP-8400 provides an Audio Settings page (FIG. 82 and FIG. 83) with options that allow you to adjust volume
levels, set intercom sound and microphone levels, and set panel sounds.
FIG. 82 Audio Settings Page (MVP-7500)
FIG. 83 Audio Settings Page (MVP-8400)
Features on these pages include:
Volume Page
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired
(image of three networked computers).
Connection Status icon:
The icon in the upper-right corner of each Setup page shows online/offline state
of the panel to the master.
• Bright red - disconnected
• Bright green - connected. Blinks when a blink message is received to dark
green every 5 seconds for half a second then go back to bright green.
• Bright yellow - panel missed a blink message from the master. It will remain
yellow for 3 missed blink messages and then turn red. It will return to green
when a blink message is received.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
Master Volume:
This section allows you to alter the current master volume level:
• Use the UP/DN buttons to adjust the volume level (range = 0 - 100).
• The Master Volume bargraph indicates the current volume level.
• The Mute button toggles the Mute feature.
Default = 50
Digital Audio Level:
Adjusts the volume level on the panel’s internal speaker:
• Use the UP/DN buttons to adjust the volume (range = 0 - 100)
• The Internal Sound Level bargraph indicates the current sound level
• The Mute button mutes the internal speaker volume
Default = 50
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
91
Setup Pages
Volume Page (Cont.)
Panel Sounds:
• Activating the Button Hit button plays a default sound when you touch an
active button.
• Activating the Button Miss button plays a default sound when you touch a
non-active button or any area outside of the active button
• The Play Test Sound button plays a test WAV/MP3 file over the panel’s
internal speakers.
• The singlebeep01 button plays the default single-beep file.
• The doublebeep03 button plays the default double-beep file.
• The Panel Docking Tone Enabled button enables or disables sound when
the panel is in a docking station or cradle.
• The Information button opens a popup explaining procedures for using the
Button Hit, Button Miss, and Panel Docking Tone Enabled buttons.
Environmental acoustics, personal voice level and ambient noise are all deciding factors when setting your mic and panel
sound levels. Consider your environment when adjusting sound levels and use caution so as not to damage the speaker.
WAV files - Supported sample rates
The following sample rates for WAV files are supported by MVP-8400 panels:
Supported WAV Sample Rates
• 48000 Hz
• 16000 Hz
• 44100 Hz
• 12000 Hz
• 32000 Hz
• 11025 Hz
• 24000 Hz
• 8000 Hz
• 22050 Hz
Custom Sounds
The custom button hit/miss sound feature allows a user to add one custom button hit and one custom button miss sound
to any user page project. Once the user page is downloaded into the panel, the user can select the custom sounds from
the Audio Setup page.
To add custom sounds to a TPDesign project, import a WAV file into the resource manager. Rename the resource to
"customSingle.wav" for a custom button hit sound or "customDouble.wav" for a custom button miss sound.
Battery Settings/Batteries
The options on the MVP-7500 Battery Settings page (FIG. 84) and the MVP-8400 Batteries page (FIG. 85) allow you to
set power warning preferences, monitor battery status information, and adjust the display times for battery warnings.
This page is populated with information from MVP-BP batteries in the panel, as well as batteries in a connected MVPTDS/WDS docking station.
FIG. 84 Battery Settings Page (MVP-7500)
92
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Setup Pages
FIG. 85 Batteries Page (MVP-8400)
Features on this page include:
Batteries Page
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired
(image of three networked computers).
Connection Status icon:
The icon in the upper-right corner of each Setup page shows online/offline state
of the panel to the master.
• Bright red - disconnected
• Bright green - connected. Blinks when a blink message is received to dark
green every 5 seconds for half a second then go back to bright green.
• Bright yellow - panel missed a blink message from the master. It will remain
yellow for 3 missed blink messages and then turn red. It will return to green
when a blink message is received.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
Battery Power Brightness
Limit:
The DISABLE/DISABLED button acts as a power save feature with two options:
• Disable - activates the brightness limit set on the panel (conserves battery
power). Activating this feature causes the panel to function at 80% of full
brightness and overrides the Panel Brightness value set on the Setup page.
• Disabled - deactivates this power save feature. The panel will use the Panel
Brightness level.
Note: This field applies to MVP-BP batteries installed in the panel.
Panel Shutdown:
This value determines the number of minutes that would need to pass before
the panel automatically shuts-down. Once shutdown, the unit would have to be
restarted. The UP/DN buttons alter the timeout value (in minutes). A value of 0
disables this feature.
Range = 0 - 240, default = 1200 min.
Note: This field applies to MVP-BP batteries installed in the panel.
Low Battery Warning:
The UP/DN buttons adjust the time value (in minutes) available on the battery
(for use) before the panel displays a low battery warning.
Range - 10 - 45, default = 15 min.
Note: This field applies to MVP-BP batteries installed in the panel.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
93
Setup Pages
Batteries Page (Cont.)
Very Low Battery Warning: The UP/DN buttons adjust the time value (in minutes) available on the battery
before the panel displays a very low battery warning (indicating near-term panel
shutdown).
• Range = 3 - 15, default = 5 min.
• This value cannot exceed the Low Battery Warning value.
Note: This field applies to MVP-BP batteries installed in the panel.
Battery Status:
• The Combined Charge Status bargraph indicates the combined power
charge available from batteries installed in the panel.
• The Battery One Charge Status bargraph indicates the power charge
available on the Slot 1 battery (in the panel).
• The Battery Two Charge Status bargraph indicates the power charge
available on the Slot 2 battery (in the panel).
• The Battery Dock 1 Charge Status bargraph indicates the power charge
available on the docking station’s battery #1.
• The Battery Dock 2 Charge Status bargraph indicates the power charge
available on the docking station’s battery #2.
Note: If no batteries are being charged within the docking station’s battery
compartments, or the MVP is not connected to a docking station; both Battery
Dock Charge Status fields are left blank.
• The Docking Station Version field indicates the firmware version currently
installed on the docking station.
• The Battery Level Port field indicates the port being used to report charge
status levels back to the NetLinx Master (set in TPDesign4).
•
The Battery Level field indicates the level being used to report status levels
back to the NetLinx Master (set in TPDesign4).
EAP Security & Server Certificates - Overview
The following EAP types all support a server certificate:
EAP-PEAP
EAP-TTLS
EAP-TLS
All three of these certificate-using security methods are documented in the following sections. EAP Authentication goes
a step beyond just encrypting data transfers, but also requires that a set of credentials be validated before the client
(panel) is allowed to connect to the rest of the network (FIG. 86). Below is a description of this process. It is important to
note that there is no user intervention necessary during this process. It proceeds automatically based on the configuration
parameters entered into the panel.
LAN
802.1x
(EAP over Wireless)
Client - Panel
(supplicant)
Authenticator
(Wireless Access Point)
Authentication Server
(RADIUS Server)
FIG. 86 EAP security method in process
A server certificate file uses a certificate that is installed in a panel so that the RADIUS server can be validated before the
panel tries to connect to it. The field name associated with this file is Certificate Authority.
94
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Setup Pages
If a server certificate is used, it should first be downloaded into the panel and the Certificate Authority field should then
be set to the name of that certificate file. No file path should be used for this setting as all certificates are stored in a
specific directory that the user cannot control or change. The most secure connection method uses a server certificate.
If no server certificate will be used then, this field should be left blank. If the field contains a file name, then a valid
certificate file with the same file name must be previously installed on the panel. Otherwise the authentication process
will fail.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
95
Setup Pages
96
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Programming
Programming
Overview
You can program this touch panel, using the commands in this section, to perform a wide variety of operations using
Send_Commands and variable text commands.
A device must first be defined in the NetLinx programming language with values for the Device: Port: System (in
all programming examples - Panel is used in place of these values and represents all Modero panels).
Verify you are using the latest NetLinx Master and Modero firmware.
Verify you are using the latest version of NetLinx Studio and TPD4.
Button Assignments
• Button Channel Range: 1 - 4000 Button push and Feedback (per address port)
• Button Variable Text range: 1 - 4000 (per address port)
• Button States Range: 1 - 256 (0 = All states, for General buttons 1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
• Level Range: 1 - 600 (Default level value 0 - 255, can be set up to 1 - 65535)
• Address port Range: 1 - 100
These button assignments can only be adjusted in TPD4 and not on the panels
themselves.
Page Commands
These Page Commands are used in NetLinx Programming Language and are case insensitive.
Page Commands
@APG
Add a specific
popup page to a
specified popup
group.
Add the popup page to a group if it does not already exist. If the new popup is added to a
group which has a popup displayed on the current page along with the new pop-up, the
displayed popup will be hidden and the new popup will be displayed.
Syntax:
"'@APG-<popup page name>;<popup group name>'"
Variable:
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.
popup group name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup group.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@APG-Popup1;Group1'"
Adds the popup page ’Popup1’ to the popup group ’Group1’.
@CPG
Clear all popup
pages from
specified popup
group.
Syntax:
"'@CPG-<popup group name>'"
Variable:
popup group name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup group.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@CPG-Group1'"
Clears all popup pages from the popup group ’Group1’.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
97
Programming
Page Commands (Cont.)
@DPG
Delete a specific
popup page from
specified popup
group if it exists.
Syntax:
"'@DPG-<popup page name>;<popup group name>'"
Variable:
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.
popup group name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup group.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@DPG-Popup1;Group1'"
Deletes the popup page ’Popup1’ from the popup group ’Group1’.
@PDR
If the flag is set, the popup will return to its default location on show instead of its last drag
location.
Set the popup
location reset flag. Syntax:
"'@PDR-<popup page name>;<reset flag>'"
Variable:
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed
On.
reset flag = 1 = Enable reset flag
0 = Disable reset flag
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PDR-Popup1;1'"
Popup1 will return to its default location when turned On.
@PHE
Syntax:
"'@PHE-<popup page name>;<hide effect name>'"
Set the hide effect
for the specified
Variable:
popup page to the
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed
named hide effect. On.
hide effect name = Refers to the popup effect names being used.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PHE-Popup1;Slide to Left'"
Sets the Popup1 hide effect name to ’Slide to Left’.
@PHP
Only 1 coordinate is ever needed for an effect; however, the command will specify both.
Set the hide effect This command sets the location at which the effect will end at.
Syntax:
position.
"'@PHP-<popup page name>;<x coordinate>,<y coordinate>'"
Variable:
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed
On.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PHP-Popup1;75,0'"
Sets the Popup1 hide effect x-coordinate value to 75 and the y-coordinate value to 0.
@PHT
Syntax:
"'@PHT-<popup page name>;<hide effect time>'"
Set the hide effect
time for the
Variable:
specified popup
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed
page.
On.
hide effect time = Given in 1/10ths of a second.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PHT-Popup1;50'"
Sets the Popup1 hide effect time to 5 seconds.
98
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Programming
Page Commands (Cont.)
@PPA
Close all popups
on a specified
page.
If the page name is empty, the current page is used. Same as the ’Clear Page’ command
in TPDesign4.
Syntax:
"'@PPA-<page name>'"
Variable:
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed On.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPA-Page1'"
Close all popups on Page1.
@PPF
Deactivate a
specific popup
page on either a
specified page or
the current page.
If the page name is empty, the current page is used (see example 2). If the popup page is
part of a group, the whole group is deactivated. This command works in the same way as
the ’Hide Popup’ command in TPDesign4.
Syntax:
"'@PPF-<popup page name>;<page name>'"
Variable:
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed On.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPF-Popup1;Main'"
Example 2:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPF-Popup1'"
Deactivates the popup page ’Popup1’ on the current page.
@PPG
Toggle a
specific popup
page on either a
specified page or
the current page.
If the page name is empty, the current page is used (see example 2). Toggling refers to the
activating/deactivating (On/Off) of a popup page. This command works in the same way
as the ’Toggle Popup’ command in TPDesign4.
Syntax:
"'@PPG-<popup page name>;<page name>'"
Variable:
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed On.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPG-Popup1;Main'"
Toggles the popup page ’Popup1’ on the ’Main’ page from one state to another (On/Off).
Example 2:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPG-Popup1'"
Toggles the popup page ’Popup1’ on the current page from one state to another (On/Off).
@PPK
Kill a specific
popup page from
all pages.
Kill refers to the deactivating (Off) of a popup window from all pages. If the pop-up page is
part of a group, the whole group is deactivated. This command works in the same way as
the 'Clear Group' command in TPDesign 4.
Syntax:
"'@PPK-<popup page name>'"
Variable:
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPK-Popup1'"
Kills the popup page ’Popup1’ on all pages.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
99
Programming
Page Commands (Cont.)
@PPM
Set the modality
of a specific
popup page to
Modal or
NonModal.
A Modal popup page, when active, only allows you to use the buttons and features on that
popup page. All other buttons on the panel page are inactivated.
Syntax:
"'@PPM-<popup page name>;<mode>'"
Variable:
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.
mode = NONMODAL converts a previously Modal popup page to a NonModal.
MODAL converts a previously NonModal popup page to Modal.
modal = 1 and non-modal = 0
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPM-Popup1;Modal'"
Sets the popup page ’Popup1’ to Modal.
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPM-Popup1;1'"
Sets the popup page ’Popup1’ to Modal.
@PPN
Activate a
specific popup
page to launch on
either a specified
page or the
current page.
If the page name is empty, the current page is used (see example 2). If the popup page is
already on, do not re-draw it. This command works in the same way as the ’Show Popup’
command in TPDesign4.
Syntax:
"'@PPN-<popup page name>;<page name>'"
Variable:
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed On.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPN-Popup1;Main'"
Activates ’Popup1’ on the ’Main’ page.
Example 2:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPN-Popup1'"
Activates the popup page ’Popup1’ on the current page.
@PPT
If timeout is empty, popup page will clear the timeout.
Set a specific
popup page to
timeout within a
specified time.
Syntax:
"'@PPT-<popup page name>;<timeout>'"
Variable:
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.
timeout = Timeout duration in 1/10ths of a second.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPT-Popup1;30'"
Sets the popup page ’Popup1’ to timeout within 3 seconds.
@PPX
This command works in the same way as the 'Clear All' command in TPDesign 4.
Close all
popups on all
pages.
Syntax:
"'@PPX'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPX'"
Close all popups on all pages.
@PSE
Set the show
effect for the
specified popup
page to the
named show
effect.
Syntax:
"'@PSE-<popup page name>;<show effect name>'"
Variable:
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed
On.
show effect name = Refers to the popup effect name being used.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PSE-Popup1;Slide from Left'"
Sets the Popup1 show effect name to ’Slide from Left’.
100
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Programming
Page Commands (Cont.)
@PSP
Set the show
effect position.
Only 1 coordinate is ever needed for an effect; however, the command will specify both.
This command sets the location at which the effect will begin at.
Syntax:
"'@PSP-<popup page name>;<x coordinate>,<y coordinate>'"
Variable:
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed
On.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PSP-Popup1;100,0'"
Sets the Popup1 show effect x-coordinate value to 100 and the y-coordinate value to 0.
@PST
Set the show
effect time for the
specified popup
page.
Syntax:
"'@PST-<popup page name>;<show effect time>'"
Variable:
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed
On.
show effect time = Given in 1/10ths of a second.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PST-Popup1;50'"
Sets the Popup1 show effect time to 5 seconds.
PAGE
Flip to a specified
page.
Flips to a page with a specified page name. If the page is currently active, it will not redraw
the page.
Syntax:
"'PAGE-<page name>'"
Variable:
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed On.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'PAGE-Page1'"
Flips to page1.
PPOF
Deactivate a
specific popup
page on either a
specified page or
the current page.
If the page name is empty, the current page is used (see example 2). If the popup page is
part of a group, the whole group is deactivated. This command works in the same way as
the ’Hide Popup’ command in TPDesign4.
Syntax:
"'PPOF-<popup page name>;<page name>'"
Variable:
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed On.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'PPOF-Popup1;Main'"
Deactivates the popup page ’Popup1’ on the Main page.
Example 2:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'PPOF-Popup1'"
Deactivates the popup page ’Popup1’ on the current page.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
101
Programming
Page Commands (Cont.)
PPOG
Toggle a
specific popup
page on either a
specified page or
the current page.
If the page name is empty, the current page is used (see example 2). Toggling refers to the
activating/deactivating (On/Off) of a popup page. This command works in the same way
as the ’Toggle Popup’ command in TPDesign4.
Syntax:
"'PPOG-<popup page name>;<page name>'"
Variable:
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed On.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'PPOG-Popup1;Main'"
Toggles the popup page ’Popup1’ on the Main page from one state to another (On/Off).
Example 2:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'PPOG-Popup1'"
Toggles the popup page ’Popup1’ on the current page from one state to another (On/Off).
PPON
Activate a
specific popup
page to launch on
either a specified
page or the
current page.
If the page name is empty, the current page is used (see example 2). If the popup page is
already On, do not re-draw it. This command works in the same way as the ’Show Popup’
command in TPDesign4.
Syntax:
"'PPON-<popup page name>;<page name>'"
Variable:
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed On.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'PPON-Popup1; Main'"
Activates the popup page ’Popup1’ on the Main page.
Example 2:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'PPON-Popup1'"
Activates the popup page ’Popup1’ on the current page.
Programming Numbers
The following information provides the programming numbers for colors, fonts, and borders.
Colors can be used to set the colors on buttons, sliders, and pages. The lowest color number represents the lightest colorspecific display; the highest number represents the darkest display. For example, 0 represents light red, and 5 is dark red.
RGB triplets and names for basic 88 colors
RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors
102
Index No. Name
Red
Green
Blue
00
Very Light Red
255
0
0
01
Light Red
223
0
0
02
Red
191
0
0
03
Medium Red
159
0
0
04
Dark Red
127
0
0
05
Very Dark Red
95
0
0
06
Very Light Orange
255
128
0
07
Light Orange
223
112
0
08
Orange
191
96
0
09
Medium Orange
159
80
0
10
Dark Orange
127
64
0
11
Very Dark Orange
95
48
0
12
Very Light Yellow
255
255
0
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Programming
RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors (Cont.)
Index No. Name
Red
Green
Blue
13
Light Yellow
223
223
0
14
Yellow
191
191
0
15
Medium Yellow
159
159
0
16
Dark Yellow
127
127
0
17
Very Dark Yellow
95
95
0
18
Very Light Lime
128
255
0
19
Light Lime
112
223
0
20
Lime
96
191
0
21
Medium Lime
80
159
0
22
Dark Lime
64
127
0
23
Very Dark Lime
48
95
0
24
Very Light Green
0
255
0
25
Light Green
0
223
0
26
Green
0
191
0
27
Medium Green
0
159
0
28
Dark Green
0
127
0
29
Very Dark Green
0
95
0
30
Very Light Mint
0
255
128
31
Light Mint
0
223
112
32
Mint
0
191
96
33
Medium Mint
0
159
80
34
Dark Mint
0
127
64
35
Very Dark Mint
0
95
48
36
Very Light Cyan
0
255
255
37
Light Cyan
0
223
223
38
Cyan
0
191
191
39
Medium Cyan
0
159
159
40
Dark Cyan
0
127
127
41
Very Dark Cyan
0
95
95
42
Very Light Aqua
0
128
255
43
Light Aqua
0
112
223
44
Aqua
0
96
191
45
Medium Aqua
0
80
159
46
Dark Aqua
0
64
127
47
Very Dark Aqua
0
48
95
48
Very Light Blue
0
0
255
49
Light Blue
0
0
223
50
Blue
0
0
191
51
Medium Blue
0
0
159
52
Dark Blue
0
0
127
53
Very Dark Blue
0
0
95
54
Very Light Purple
128
0
255
55
Light Purple
112
0
223
56
Purple
96
0
191
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
103
Programming
RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors (Cont.)
104
Index No. Name
Red
Green
Blue
57
Medium Purple
80
0
159
58
Dark Purple
64
0
127
59
Very Dark Purple
48
0
95
60
Very Light Magenta
255
0
255
61
Light Magenta
223
0
223
62
Magenta
191
0
191
63
Medium Magenta
159
0
159
64
Dark Magenta
127
0
127
65
Very Dark Magenta
95
0
95
66
Very Light Pink
255
0
128
67
Light Pink
223
0
112
68
Pink
191
0
96
69
Medium Pink
159
0
80
70
Dark Pink
127
0
64
71
Very Dark Pink
95
0
48
72
White
255
255
255
73
Grey1
238
238
238
74
Grey3
204
204
204
75
Grey5
170
170
170
76
Grey7
136
136
136
77
Grey9
102
102
102
78
Grey4
187
187
187
79
Grey6
153
153
153
80
Grey8
119
119
119
81
Grey10
85
85
85
82
Grey12
51
51
51
83
Grey13
34
34
34
84
Grey2
221
221
221
85
Grey11
68
68
68
86
Grey14
17
17
17
87
Black
0
0
0
255
TRANSPARENT
99
53
99
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Programming
Font styles and ID numbers
Font styles can be used to program the text fonts on buttons, sliders, and pages. The following chart shows the default
font type and their respective ID numbers generated by TPDesign4.
Default Font Styles and ID Numbers
Font ID #
Font type
Size
1
Courier New
9
2
Courier New
12
3
Courier New
4
Courier New
5
6
Font ID #
Font type
Size
19
Arial
9
20
Arial
10
18
21
Arial
12
26
22
Arial
14
Courier New
32
23
Arial
16
Courier New
18
24
Arial
18
7
Courier New
26
25
Arial
20
8
Courier New
34
26
Arial
24
9
AMX Bold
14
27
Arial
36
10
AMX Bold
20
28
Arial Bold
10
11
AMX Bold
36
29
Arial Bold
8
32 - Variable Fonts start at 32.
You must import fonts into a TPDesign4 project file. The font ID numbers are
assigned by TPDesign4. These values are also listed in the
Generate Programmer’s Report.
Border styles and Programming numbers
Border styles can be used to program borders on buttons, sliders, and popup pages.
Border Styles and Programming Numbers
No.
Border styles
No.
Border styles
0-1
No border
10-11
Picture frame
2
Single line
12
Double line
3
Double line
20
Bevel-S
4
Quad line
21
Bevel-M
5-6
Circle 15
22-23
Circle 15
7
Single line
24-27
Neon inactive-S
8
Double line
40-41
Diamond 55
9
Quad line
The TPDesign4 Touch Panel Design program has pre-set border styles that are user selectable.
You cannot use the following number values for programming purposes when changing border styles. TPD4 border
styles can ONLY be changed by using the name.
TPD4 Border Styles by Name
No.
Border styles
No.
Border styles
1
None
6
Bevel -M
2
AMX Elite -L
7
Bevel -S
3
AMX Elite -M
8
Circle 15
4
AMX Elite -S
9
Circle 25
5
Bevel -L
10
Circle 35
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
105
Programming
TPD4 Border Styles by Name (Cont.)
106
No.
Border styles
No.
Border styles
11
Circle 45
55
Double Bevel -L
12
Circle 55
56
Double Bevel -M
13
Circle 65
57
Double Bevel -S
14
Circle 75
58
Double Line
15
Circle 85
59
Fuzzy
16
Circle 95
60
Glow-L
17
Circle 105
61
Glow-S
18
Circle 115
62
Help Down
19
Circle 125
63
Neon Active -L
20
Circle 135
64
Neon Active -S
21
Circle 145
65
Neon Inactive -L
22
Circle 155
66
Neon Inactive -S
23
Circle 165
67
Oval H 60x30
24
Circle 175
68
Oval H 100x50
25
Circle 185
69
Oval H 150x75
26
Circle 195
70
Oval H 200x100
27
Cursor Bottom
71
Oval V 30x60
28
Cursor Bottom with Hole
72
Oval V 50x100
29
Cursor Top
73
Oval V 75x150
30
Cursor Top with Hole
74
Oval V 100x200
31
Cursor Left
75
Picture Frame
32
Cursor Left with Hole
76
Quad Line
33
Cursor Right
77
Single Line
34
Cursor Right with Hole
78
Windows Style Popup
35
Custom Frame
79
Windows Style Popup (Status Bar)
36
Diamond 15
80
Menu Bottom Rounded 15
37
Diamond 25
81
Menu Bottom Rounded 25
38
Diamond 35
82
Menu Bottom Rounded 35
39
Diamond 45
83
Menu Bottom Rounded 45
40
Diamond 55
84
Menu Bottom Rounded 55
41
Diamond 65
85
Menu Bottom Rounded 65
42
Diamond 75
86
Menu Bottom Rounded 75
43
Diamond 85
87
Menu Bottom Rounded 85
44
Diamond 95
88
Menu Bottom Rounded 95
45
Diamond 105
89
Menu Bottom Rounded 105
46
Diamond 115
90
Menu Bottom Rounded 115
47
Diamond 125
91
Menu Bottom Rounded 125
48
Diamond 135
92
Menu Bottom Rounded 135
49
Diamond 145
93
Menu Bottom Rounded 145
50
Diamond 155
94
Menu Bottom Rounded 155
51
Diamond 165
95
Menu Bottom Rounded 165
52
Diamond 175
96
Menu Bottom Rounded 175
53
Diamond 185
97
Menu Bottom Rounded 185
54
Diamond 195
98
Menu Bottom Rounded 195
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Programming
TPD4 Border Styles by Name (Cont.)
99
Menu Top Rounded 15
128
Menu Right Rounded 115
100
Menu Top Rounded 25
129
Menu Right Rounded 125
101
Menu Top Rounded 35
130
Menu Right Rounded 135
102
Menu Top Rounded 45
131
Menu Right Rounded 145
103
Menu Top Rounded 55
132
Menu Right Rounded 155
104
Menu Top Rounded 65
133
Menu Right Rounded 165
105
Menu Top Rounded 75
134
Menu Right Rounded 175
106
Menu Top Rounded 85
135
Menu Right Rounded 185
107
Menu Top Rounded 95
136
Menu Right Rounded 195
108
Menu Top Rounded 105
137
Menu Left Rounded 15
109
Menu Top Rounded 115
138
Menu Left Rounded 25
110
Menu Top Rounded 125
139
Menu Left Rounded 35
111
Menu Top Rounded 135
140
Menu Left Rounded 45
112
Menu Top Rounded 145
141
Menu Left Rounded 55
113
Menu Top Rounded 155
142
Menu Left Rounded 65
114
Menu Top Rounded 165
143
Menu Left Rounded 75
115
Menu Top Rounded 175
144
Menu Left Rounded 85
116
Menu Top Rounded 185
145
Menu Left Rounded 95
117
Menu Top Rounded 195
146
Menu Left Rounded 105
118
Menu Right Rounded 15
147
Menu Left Rounded 115
119
Menu Right Rounded 25
148
Menu Left Rounded 125
120
Menu Right Rounded 35
149
Menu Left Rounded 135
121
Menu Right Rounded 45
150
Menu Left Rounded 145
122
Menu Right Rounded 55
151
Menu Left Rounded 155
123
Menu Right Rounded 65
152
Menu Left Rounded 165
124
Menu Right Rounded 75
153
Menu Left Rounded 175
125
Menu Right Rounded 85
154
Menu Left Rounded 185
126
Menu Right Rounded 95
155
Menu Left Rounded 195
127
Menu Right Rounded 105
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
107
Programming
"^" Button Commands
These Button Commands are used in NetLinx Studio and are case insensitive.
All commands that begin with "^" have the capability of assigning a variable text address range and button state range. A
device must first be defined in the NetLinx programming language with values for the Device: Port : System (in all
programming examples - Panel is used in place of these values).
Variable text ranges allow you to target 1 or more variable text channels in a single command.
Button State ranges allow you to target 1 or more states of a variable text button with a single command.
 "." Character is used for the 'through' notation, also the "&" character is used for the 'And' notation.
"^" Button Commands
^ANI
Syntax:
Run a button
animation
(in 1/10 second).
Variable:
"'^ANI-<vt addr range>,<start state>,<end state>,<time>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
start state = Beginning of button state (0= current state).
end state = End of button state.
time = In 1/10 second intervals.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^ANI-500,1,25,100'"
Runs a button animation at text range 500 from state 1 to state 25 for 10 second.
^APF
Add page flip
action to a button
if it does not
already exist.
Syntax:
"'^APF-<vt addr range>,<page flip action>,<page name>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
page flip action =
Stan[dardPage] - Flip to standard page
Prev[iousPage] - Flip to previous page
Show[Popup] - Show Popup page
Hide[Popup] - Hide Popup page
Togg[lePopup] - Toggle popup state
ClearG[roup] - Clear popup page group from all pages
ClearP[age] - Clear all popup pages from a page with the
specified page name
ClearA[ll] - Clear all popup pages from all pages
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^APF-400,Stan,Main Page'"
Assigns a button to a standard page flip with page name 'Main Page'.
^BAT
Syntax:
Append
non-unicode text.
Variable:
"'^BAT-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<new text>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
new text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BAT-520,1,Enter City'"
Appends the text 'Enter City' to the button’s OFF state.
108
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^BAU
Same format as ^UNI.
Append
unicode text.
Syntax:
"'^BAU-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<unicode text>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
unicode text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Unicode characters must be entered in Hex
format.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BAU-520,1,00770062'"
Appends Unicode text '00770062' to the button’s OFF state.
^BCB
Only if the specified border color is not the same as the current color.
Set the border
color to the
specified color.
Note: Color can be assigned by color name (without spaces), number or R,G,B value
(RRGGBB or RRGGBBAA).
Syntax:
"'^BCB-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<color value>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
color value = Refer to theRGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 102 for more
information.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BCB-500.504&510,1,12'"
Sets the Off state border color to 12 (Yellow). Colors can be set by Color Numbers, Color
name, R,G,B,alpha colors (RRGGBBAA) and R, G & B colors values (RRGGBB).
Refer to theRGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 102.
^BCF
Only if the specified fill color is not the same as the current color.
Set the fill color to
the specified
color.
Note: Color can be assigned by color name (without spaces), number or R,G,B value
(RRGGBB or RRGGBBAA).
Syntax:
"'^BCF-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<color value>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
color value = Refer to theRGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 102 for more
information.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND
SEND_COMMAND
SEND_COMMAND
SEND_COMMAND
Panel,"'^BCF-500.504&510.515,1,12'"
Panel,"'^BCF-500.504&510.515,1,Yellow'"
Panel,"'^BCF-500.504&510.515,1,#F4EC0A63''"
Panel,"'^BCF-500.504&510.515,1,#F4EC0A'"
Sets the Off state fill color by color number. Colors can be set by Color Numbers, Color
name, R,G,B,alpha colors (RRGGBBAA) and R, G & B colors values (RRGGBB).
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
109
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^BCT
Only if the specified text color is not the same as the current color.
Set the text color
to the specified
color.
Note: Color can be assigned by color name (without spaces), number or R,G,B value
(RRGGBB or RRGGBBAA).
Syntax:
"'^BCT-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<color value>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
color value = Refer to theRGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 102 for more
information.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BCT-500.504&510,1,12'"
Sets the Off state border color to 12 (Yellow). Colors can be set by Color Numbers, Color
name, R,G,B,alpha colors (RRGGBBAA) and R, G & B colors values (RRGGBB).
^BDO
Determines what order each layer of the button is drawn.
Set the button
draw order.
Syntax:
"'^BDO-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<1-5><1-5><1-5><1-5><15>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
layer assignments = Fill Layer
=1
Image Layer = 2
Icon Layer = 3
Text Layer = 4
Border Layer = 5
Note: The layer assignments are from bottom to top. The default draw order is 12345.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BDO-530,1&2,51432'"
Sets the button’s variable text 530 ON/OFF state draw order (from bottom to top) to
Border, Fill, Text, Icon, and Image.
Example 2:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BDO-1,0,12345'"
Sets all states of a button back to its default drawing order.
^BFB
ONLY works on General-type buttons.
Set the feedback Syntax:
type of the button.
"'^BFB-<vt addr range>,<feedback type>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
feedback type = (None, Channel, Invert, On (Always on), Momentary, and Blink).
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BFB-500,Momentary'"
Sets the Feedback type of the button to 'Momentary'.
110
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^BIM
Syntax:
"'^BIM-<vt addr range>,<input mask>'"
Set the input
mask for the
Variable:
specified address.
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
input mask = Refer to the Text Area Input Masking section on page 158 for character
types.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BIM-500,AAAAAAAAAA'"
Sets the input mask to ten ’A’ characters, that are required, to either a letter or digit
(entry is required).
^BLN
Set the number of
lines removed
equally from the
top and bottom of
a composite video
signal.
The maximum number of lines to remove is 240. A value of 0 will display the incoming
video signal unaffected. This command is used to scale non 4x3 video images into non
4x3 video buttons.
Syntax:
"'^BLN-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<number of lines>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
number of lines = 0 - 240.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BLN-500,55'"
Equally removes 55 lines from the top and 55 lines from the bottom of the video button.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
111
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^BMC
Button copy
command.
Copy attributes of
the source button
to all the
destination
buttons.
Note that the source is a single button state. Each state must be copied as a separate
command. The <codes> section represents what attributes will be copied. All codes are
2 char pairs that can be separated by comma, space, percent or just ran together.
Syntax:
"'^BMC-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<source port>,<source
address>,<source state>,<codes>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
• source port = 1 - 100.
• source address = 1 - 4000.
• source state = 1 - 256.
codes:
BM - Picture/Bitmap
BR - Border
CB - Border Color
CF - Fill Color
CT - Text Color
EC - Text effect color
EF - Text effect
FT - Font
IC - Icon
JB - Bitmap alignment
JI - Icon alignment
JT - Text alignment
LN - Lines of video removed
OP - Opacity
SO - Button Sound
TX - Text
VI - Video slot ID
WW - Word wrap on/off
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BMC-425,1,1,500,1,BR'"
or
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BMC-425,1,1,500,1,%BR'"
Copies the OFF state border of button with a variable text address of 500 onto the OFF
state border of button with a variable text address of 425.
Example 2:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BMC-150,1,1,315,1,%BR%FT%TX%BM%IC%CF%CT'"
Copies the OFF state border, font, Text, bitmap, icon, fill color and text color of the button
with a variable text address of 315 onto the OFF state border, font, Text, bitmap, icon, fill
color and text color of the button with a variable text address of 150.
112
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^BMF
Set any/all button
parameters by
sending
embedded codes
and data.
Syntax:
"'^BMF-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<data>'"
Variables:
variable text address char array = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
level range = 1 - 600 (level value is 1 - 65535).
data:
’%R<left>, <top>, <right>, <bottom>’ = Set rectangle.
’%B<border style>’ = Set the border style name. See theBorder Styles and Programming
Numbers table on page 105.
’%B’,<border 0-27,40,41> = Set the borer style number. See theBorder Styles and
Programming Numbers table on page 105.
’%DO<1-5><1-5><1-5><1-5><1-5> = Set the draw order. Listed from bottom to top.
Refer to the ^BDO command on page 110 for more information.
’%F’,<font 1-8,10,11,20-29,32-xx> = Set the font. See theDefault Font Styles and ID
Numbers table on page 105.
’%F<font 01-08,10,11,20-29,32-xx>’ = Set the font. See theDefault Font Styles and ID
Numbers table on page 105.
’%MI<mask image>’ = Set the mask image. Refer to the ^BMI command on page 115 for
more information.
’%T<text >’ = Set the text using ASCII characters (empty is clear).
’%P<bitmap>’ = Set the picture/bitmap filename (empty is clear).
’%I’,<icon 01-9900, 0-clear>’ = Set the icon using values of 01 - 9900 (icon numbers are
assigned in the TPDesign4 Resource Manager tab - Slots section).
’%I<icon 01-9900, 0-clear>’ = Set the icon using values of 01 - 9900 (icon numbers are
assigned in the TPDesign4 Resource Manager tab - Slots section).
’%J’,<alignment of text 1-9> = As shown the following telephone keypad alignment
chart:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Zero can be used for an absolute position
’%JT<alignment of text 0-9>’ = As shown the above telephone keypad alignment chart,
BUT the 0 (zero) is absolute and followed by ’,<left>,<top>’
’%JB<alignment of bitmap/picture 0-9>’ = As shown the above telephone keypad
alignment chart BUT the 0 (zero) is absolute and followed by ’,<left>,<top>’
’%JI<alignment of icon 0-9>’ = As shown the above telephone keypad alignment chart,
BUT the 0 (zero) is absolute and followed by ’,<left>,<top>’
For some of these commands and values, refer to theRGB Values for all 88 Basic
Colors table on page 102.
’%CF<on fill color>’ = Set Fill Color.
’%CB<on border color>’ = Set Border Color.
’%CT<on text color>’ = Set Text Color.
’%SW<1 or 0>’ = Show/hide a button.
’%SO<sound>’ = Set the button sound.
’%EN<1 or 0>’ = Enable/disable a button.
’%WW<1 or 0>’ = Word wrap ON/OFF.
’%GH<bargraph hi>’ = Set the bargraph upper limit.
’%GL<bargraph low>’ = Set the bargraph lower limit.
’%GN<bargraph slider name>’ = Set the bargraph slider name/Joystick cursor name.
’%GC<bargraph slider color>’ = Set the bargraph slider color/Joystick cursor color.
’%GI<bargraph invert>’ = Set the bargraph invert/noninvert or joystick coordinate
(0,1,2,3). ^GIV section on page 121 more information.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
113
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^BMF
(Cont.)
’%GU<bargraph ramp up>’ = Set the bargraph ramp up time in intervals of 1/10 second.
’%GD<bargraph ramp down>’ = Set the bargraph ramp down time in 1/10 second.
’%GG<bargraph drag increment> = Set the bargraph drag increment. Refer to the ^GDI
command on page 121 for more information.
’%VI<video ON/OFF>’ = Set the Video either ON (value=1) or OFF (value=0).
’%OT<feedback type>’ = Set the Feedback (Output) Type to one of the following:
None, Channel,Invert, ON (Always ON), Momentary, or Blink.
’%SM’ = Submit a text for text area button.
’%SF<1 or 0>’ = Set the focus for text area button.
’%OP<0-255>’ = Set the button opacity to either Invisible (value=0) or Opaque
(value=255).
’%OP#<00-FF>’ = Set the button opacity to either Invisible (value=00) or Opaque
(value=FF).
’%UN<Unicode text>’ = Set the Unicode text. See the^UNI section on page 126 for the
text format.
’%LN<0-240>’ = Set the lines of video being removed. ^BLN section on page 111 for
more information.
’%EF<text effect name>’ = Set the text effect.
’%EC<text effect color>’ = Set the text effect color.
’%ML<max length>’ = Set the maximum length of a text area.
’%MK<input mask>’ = Set the input mask of a text area.
’%VL<0-1>’ = Log-On/Log-Off the computer control connection
’%VN<network name>’ = Set network connection name.
’%VP<password>’ = Set the network connection password.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BMF-500,1,%B10%CFRed%CB Blue
%CTBlack%Ptest.png'"
Sets the button OFF state as well as the Border, Fill Color, Border Color, Text Color, and
Bitmap.
114
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^BMI
Set the button
mask image.
Mask image is used to crop a borderless button to a non-square shape. This is typically
used with a bitmap.
Syntax:
"'^BMI-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<mask image>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
mask image = Graphic file used.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BMI-530,1&2,newMac.png'"
Sets the button with variable text 530 ON/OFF state mask image to 'newmac.png'.
"'^BMI-<variable text address range>,<button states range>,<mask image>'"
Set the Chameleon Image button property. See Working With Chameleon Images in
TPD4 Help.
Note: If the Border Style properties is set to something other than 'None', no visible
change will occur. Setting the Border Style to 'None' via ^BOR or ^BMF..%B will reveal the
Chameleon image.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'^BMI-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<mask
image>'"
Variables:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons
(0 = All states, for General buttons 1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
mask image = Chameleon used.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BMI-530,1&2,newMac.png'"
Sets the button with variable text 530 ON/OFF state mask image to 'newmac.png'.
^BML
Set the maximum
length of the text
area button.
If this value is set to zero (0) there is no max length. The maximum length available is
2000. This is only for a Text area input button and not for a Text area input masking button.
Syntax:
"'^BML-<vt addr range>,<max length>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
max length = 2000 (0=no max length).
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BML-500,20'"
Sets the maximum length of the text area input button to 20 characters.
Syntax:
"'^BMP-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<name of bitmap/
Assign a picture to
picture>'"
those buttons with
a defined address Variable:
range.
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
^BMP
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
name of bitmap/picture = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BMP-500.504&510.515,1,bitmap.png'"
Sets the OFF state picture for the buttons with variable text ranges of 500-504 & 510-515.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
115
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^BNC
Syntax:
Clear current
TakeNote
annotations.
Variable:
"'^BNC-<vt addr range>,<command value>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
command value = (0= clear, 1= clear all).
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BNC-973,0'"
Clears the annotation of the TakeNote button with variable text 973.
^BNN
Set the TakeNote
network name for
the specified
Addresses.
Syntax:
"'^BNN-<vt addr range>,<network name>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
network name = Use a valid IP Address.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BNN-973,192.168.169.99'"
Sets the TakeNote button network name to 192.168.169.99.
^BNT
Set the TakeNote
network port for
the specified
Addresses.
Syntax:
"'^BNT-<vt addr range>,<network port>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
network port = 1 - 65535.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BNT-973,5000'"
Sets the TakeNote button network port to 5000.
^BOP
Set the button
opacity.
The button opacity can be specified as a decimal between 0 - 255, where zero (0) is
invisible and 255 is opaque, or as a HEX code, as used in the color commands by
preceding the HEX code with the # sign. In this case, #00 becomes invisible and #FF
becomes opaque. If the opacity is set to zero (0), this does not make the button inactive,
only invisible.
Syntax:
"'^BOP-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<button opacity>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
button opacity = 0 (invisible) - 255 (opaque).
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BOP-500.504&510.515,1,200'"
Example 2:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BOP-500.504&510.515,1,#C8'"
Both examples set the opacity of the buttons with the variable text range of 500-504 and
510-515 to 200.
116
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^BOR
Set a border to a
specific border
style associated
with a border
value for those
buttons with a
defined address
range.
Refer to theBorder Styles and Programming Numbers table on page 105 for more
information.
Syntax:
"'^BOR-<vt addr range>,<border style name or border value>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
border style name = Refer to theBorder Styles and Programming Numbers table on
page 105.
border value = 0 - 41.
Examples:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BOR-500.504&510.515,10'"
Sets the border by number (#10) to those buttons with the variable text range of 500-504
& 510-515.
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BOR-500.504&510,AMX Elite -M'"
Sets the border by name (AMX Elite) to those buttons with the variable text range of
500-504 & 510-515.
The border style is available through the TPDesign4 border-style drop-down list. Refer to
theTPD4 Border Styles by Name table on page 105 for more information.
^BOS
Set the button to
display either a
Video or
Non-Video
window.
Syntax:
"'^BOS-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<video state>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
video state = Video Off = 0 and Video On = 1.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BOS-500,1,1'"
Sets the button to display video.
^BPP
Zero clears the flag.
Syntax:
Set or clear the
protected page flip
"'^BPP-<vt addr range>,<protected page flip flag value>'"
flag of a button.
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
protected page flip flag value range = 0 - 4 (0 clears the flag).
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BPP-500,1'"
Sets the button to protected page flip flag 1 (sets it to password 1).
^BRD
Set the border of
a button state/
states.
Only if the specified border is not the same as the current border. The border names are
available through the TPDesign4 border-name drop-down list.
Syntax:
"'^BRD-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<border name>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
border name = Refer toBorder Styles and Programming Numbers table on page 105.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BRD-500.504&510.515,1&2,Quad Line'"
Sets the border by name (Quad Line) to those buttons with the variable text range of
500-504 & 510-515.
Refer to theTPD4 Border Styles by Name table on page 105.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
117
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^BSF
Set the focus to
the text area.
Note: Select one button at a time (single variable text address). Do not assign a variable
text address range to set focus to multiple buttons. Only one variable text address can be
in focus at a time.
Syntax:
"'^BSF-<vt addr range>,<selection value>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
selection value = Unselect = 0 and select = 1.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BSF-500,1'"
Sets the focus to the text area of the button.
^BSM
This command causes the text areas to send their text as strings to the NetLinx Master.
Submit text for
text area buttons.
Syntax:
"'^BSM-<vt addr range>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BSM-500'"
Submits the text of the text area button.
^BSO
Set the sound
played when a
button is pressed.
If the sound name is blank the sound is then cleared. If the sound name is not matched,
the button sound is not changed.
Syntax:
"'^BSO-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<sound name>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
sound name = (blank - sound cleared, not matched - button sound not changed).
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BSO-500,1&2,music.wav'"
Assigns the sound 'music.wav' to the button Off/On states.
^BVL
Log-On/Log-Off
the computer
control
connection.
Syntax:
"'^BVL-<vt addr range>,<connection>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
connection = 0 (Log-Off connection) and 1 (Log-On connection).
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BVL-500,0'"
Logs-off the computer control connection of the button.
^BVN
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'^BVN-<vt addr range>,<remote host>'"
Set the computer
control remote
Variables:
host for the
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
specified address.
remote host = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BVN-500,191.191.191.191'"
Sets the remote host to '191.191.191.191' for the specific computer control button.
118
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^BVP
Syntax:
"'^BVP-<vt addr range>,<network password>'"
Set the network
password for the
Variable:
specified address.
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
network password = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BVP-500,PCLOCK'"
Sets the password to PCLOCK for the specific PC control button.
Syntax:
"'^BVT-<vt addr range>,<network port>'"
Set the computer
control network
Variable:
port for the
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
specified address.
network port = 1 - 65535.
^BVT
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BVT-500,5000'"
Sets the network port to 5000.
^BWW
By default, word-wrap is Off.
Set the button
word wrap
feature to those
buttons with a
defined address
range.
Syntax:
"'^BWW-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<word wrap>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
word wrap = (0=Off and 1=On). Default is Off.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BWW-500,1,1'"
Sets the word wrap on for the button’s Off state.
^CPF
Syntax:
"'^CPF-<vt addr range>'"
Clear all page flips
from a button.
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^CPF-500'"
Clears all page flips from the button.
^DLD
Syntax:
Set the disable
cradle LED flag.
Variable:
"'^DLD-<status>'"
status = (0= cradle operates normally, 1= forces the cradle LEDs to always be dim).
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^DLD-1'"
Disables the cradle LEDs.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
119
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^DPF
Syntax:
Delete page flips
from button if it
already exists.
Variable:
"'^DFP-<vt addr range>,<actions>,<page name>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
actions =
Stan[dardPage] - Flip to standard page
Prev[iousPage] - Flip to previous page
Show[Popup] - Show Popup page
Hide[Popup] - Hide Popup page
Togg[lePopup] - Toggle popup state
ClearG[roup] - Clear popup page group from all pages
ClearP[age] - Clear all popup pages from a page with the
specified page name
ClearA[ll] - Clear all popup pages from all pages
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^DPF-409,Prev'"
Deletes the assignment of a button from flipping to a previous page.
^ENA
Enable or
disable buttons
with a set
variable text
range.
Syntax:
"'^ENA-<vt addr range>,<command value>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
command value = (0= disable, 1= enable)
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^ENA-500.504&510.515,0'"
Disables button pushes on buttons with variable text range 500-504 & 510-515.
^FON
Font ID numbers are generated by the TPDesign4 programmers report.
Set a font to a
specific Font ID
value for those
buttons with a
defined address
range.
Syntax:
"'^FON-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<font value>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
font value = range = 1 - XXX. Refer to theDefault Font Styles and ID Numbers table on
page 105.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^FON-500.504&510.515,1&2,4'"
Sets the font size to font ID #4 for the On and Off states of buttons with the variable text
range of 500-504 & 510-515.
The Font ID is generated by TPD4 and is located in TPD4 through the Main menu.
Panel > Generate Programmer's Report >Text Only Format >Readme.txt.
120
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^GDI
Syntax:
Change the
bargraph drag
increment.
Variable:
"'^GDI-<vt addr range>,<bargraph drag increment>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
bargraph drag increment = The default drag increment is 256.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^GDI-7,128'"
Sets the bargraph with variable text 7 to a drag increment of 128.
^GIV
Invert the
joystick axis to
move the origin to
another corner.
Parameters 1,2, and 3 will cause a bargraph or slider to be inverted regardless of
orientation. Their effect will be as described for joysticks.
Syntax:
"'^GIV-<vt addr range>,<joystick axis to invert>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
joystick axis to invert = 0 - 3.
0
1
2
3
0 = Normal
1 = Invert horizontal axis
2 = Invert vertical axis
3 = Invert both axis locations
For a bargraph 1 = Invert , 0 = Non Invert
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^GIV-500,3'"
Inverts the joystick axis origin to the bottom right corner.
^GLH
Syntax:
Change the
bargraph upper
limit.
Variable:
"'^GLH-<vt addr range>,<bargraph hi>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
bargraph limit range = 1 - 65535 (bargraph upper limit range).
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^GLH-500,1000'"
Changes the bargraph upper limit to 1000.
^GLL
Syntax:
Change the
bargraph lower
limit.
Variable:
"'^GLL-<vt addr range>,<bargraph low>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
bargraph limit range = 1 - 65535 (bargraph lower limit range).
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^GLL-500,150'"
Changes the bargraph lower limit to 150.
^GRD
Change the
bargraph
ramp-down time
in 1/10th of a
second.
Syntax:
"'^GRD-<vt addr range>,<bargraph ramp down time>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
bargraph ramp down time = In 1/10th of a second intervals.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^GRD-500,200'"
Changes the bargraph ramp down time to 20 seconds.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
121
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^GRU
Change the
bargraph
ramp-up time in
1/10th of a
second.
Syntax:
"'^GRU-<vt addr range>,<bargraph ramp up time>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
bargraph ramp up time = In 1/10th of a second intervals.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^GRU-500,100'"
Changes the bargraph ramp up time to 10 seconds.
^GSC
A user can also assign the color by Name and R,G,B value (RRGGBB or RRGGBBAA).
Change the
bargraph slider
color or joystick
cursor color.
Syntax:
"'^GSC-<vt addr range>,<color value>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
color value = Refer to theRGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 102.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^GSC-500,12'"
Changes the bargraph or joystick slider color to Yellow.
^GSN
Change the
bargraph slider
name or joystick
cursor name.
Slider names and cursor names can be found in the TPDesign4 slider name and cursor
drop-down list.
Syntax:
"'^GSN-<vt addr range>,<bargraph slider name>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
bargraph slider name = See table below.
Bargraph Slider Names:
None
Ball
Circle -L
Circle -M
Circle -S
Precision
Rectangle -L
Rectangle -M
Rectangle -S
Windows
Windows Active
Joystick Cursor Names:
None
Arrow
Ball
Circle
Crosshairs
Gunsight
Hand
Metal
Spiral
Target
View Finder
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^GSN-500,Ball'"
Changes the bargraph slider name or the Joystick cursor name to ’Ball’.
^ICO
Syntax:
Set the icon to a
button.
Variable:
"'^ICO-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<icon index>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
icon index range = 0 - 9900 (a value of 0 is clear).
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^ICO-500.504&510.515,1&2,1'"
Sets the icon for On and Off states for buttons with variable text ranges of 500-504 &
510-515.
122
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^IRM
Set the IR
channel.
Pulse the given IR channel for onTime in tenths of seconds. Delay offTime in tenths of a
second before the next IR pulse is allowed. ^IRM allows the command itself to specify the
port number. ^IRM is needed because commands programmed on the panel itself can
only be sent to a single port number. (currently this is defined as 1 only).
Note: The port number of the IR will be the port number assigned in TPD4.
Syntax:
"'^IRM-<port>,<channel>,<onTime>,<offTime>'"
Variable:
port = User-defined port on the device (panel).
channel = 1 - 255 (channel to pulse).
onTime = 1/10th of a second.
offTime = 1/10th of a second.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^IRM-10,5, 20, 10'"
Sets the port 10 IR channel 5 on time to 1 second and off time to 2 seconds.
The alignment of 0 is followed by ',<left>,<top>'. The left and top coordinates are relative
to the upper left corner of the button.
Set bitmap/
picture alignment Syntax:
using a numeric
"'^JSB-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<new text alignment>'"
keypad layout for Variable:
those buttons with
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
a defined address
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
range.
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
^JSB
new text alignment = Value of 1- 9 corresponds to the following locations:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Zero can be used for an absolute position
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^JSB-500.504&510.515,1&2,1'"
Sets the off/on state picture alignment to upper left corner for those buttons with variable
text ranges of 500-504 & 510-515.
^JSI
Set icon
alignment using a
numeric keypad
layout for those
buttons with a
defined address
range.
The alignment of 0 is followed by ',<left>,<top>'. The left and top coordinates are relative
to the upper left corner of the button.
Syntax:
"'^JSI-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<new icon alignment>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
new icon alignment = Value of 1 - 9 corresponds to the following locations:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Zero can be used for an absolute position
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^JSI-500.504&510.515,1&2,1'"
Sets the Off/On state icon alignment to upper left corner for those buttons with variable
text range of 500-504 & 510-515.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
123
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^JST
The alignment of 0 is followed by ',<left>,<top>'. The left and top coordinates are relative
to the upper left corner of the button.
Set text
alignment using a Syntax:
numeric keypad
"'^JST-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<new text alignment>'"
layout for those
Variable:
buttons with a
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
defined address
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
range.
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
new text alignment = Value of 1 - 9 corresponds to the following locations:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Zero can be used for an absolute position
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^JST-500.504&510.515,1&2,1'"
Sets the text alignment to the upper left corner for those buttons with variable text ranges
of 500-504 & 510-515.
^MBT
Syntax:
Set the Mouse
Button mode On
for the virtual PC.
Variable:
"'^MBT-<pass data>'"
pass data:
0 = None
1 = Left
2 = Right
3 = Middle
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^MBT-1'"
Sets the mouse button mode to ’Left Mouse Click’.
^MDC
Turn On the
’Mouse
double-click’
feature for the
virtual PC.
^SAV
Save the
configuration
values.
^SHO
Show or hide a
button with a set
variable text
range.
Syntax:
"'^MDC'"
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^MDC'"
Sets the mouse double-click for use with the virtual PC.
Syntax:
"’^SAV’"
Syntax:
"'^SHO-<vt addr range>,<command value>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
command value = (0= hide, 1= show).
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^SHO-500.504&510.515,0'"
Hides buttons with variable text address range 500-504 & 510-515.
124
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^SKT
Receive touch
information on
specified socket.
Syntax:
'^SKT-<0=disable socket, greater than 1023=enable socket on specified
port>
Only socket values equal to or greater than 1024 are valid. The panel will open up a TCP
listening socket on the port specified. User or 3rd party program can connect to the panel
using this port/socket number and receive touch/release/move strings. By default, the
panel disables touch notifications on startup. Format of the output is:
<Press/Release/Move>,<x-coordinate>,<y-coordinate>
Example:
send_command TP, '^SKT-7425' (enables touch notifications on socket
7425) send_command TP, '^SKT-0' (disable touch notification)
^STO
Set the shutdown
timeout value.
^TEC
Set the text effect
color for the
specified
addresses/states
to the specified
color.
Returned in Custom event.
Value1=shutdown timeout value (in minutes)
The Text Effect is specified by name and can be found in TPD4. You can also assign the
color by name or RGB value (RRGGBB or RRGGBBAA).
Syntax:
"'^TEC-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<color value>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
color value = Refer to theRGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 102.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^TEC-500.504&510.515,1&2,12'"
Sets the text effect color to Very Light Yellow on buttons with variable text 500-504
and 510-515.
^TEF
The Text Effect is specified by name and can be found in TPD4.
Set the text effect. Syntax:
"'^TEF-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<text effect name>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
text effect name = Refer to theText Effects table on page 128 for a listing of text
effect names.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^TEF-500.504&510.515,1&2,Soft Drop Shadow 3'"
Sets the text effect to Soft Drop Shadow 3 for the button with variable text range 500-504
and 510-515.
^TOP
Syntax:
^TOP-<0=disable output,1=enable output>
Enable/disable
SEND strings sent Enable/disable send strings sent to master when PRESS/RELEASE happens:
to the master.
Press,564,219
or
Release,445,224
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
125
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^TXT
Sets Non-Unicode text.
Assign a text
string to those
buttons with a
defined address
range.
Syntax:
"'^TXT-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<new text>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
new text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^TXT-500.504&510.515,1&2,Test Only'"
Sets the On and Off state text for buttons with the variable text ranges of
500-504 & 510-515.
^UNI
Set Unicode text.
For the ^UNI command (%UN and ^BMF command), the Unicode text is sent as
ASCII-HEX nibbles.
Syntax:
"'^UNI-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<unicode text>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
unicode text = Unicode HEX value.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^UNI-500,1,0041'"
Sets the button’s unicode character to ’A’.
Note: To send the variable text ’A’ in unicode to all states of the variable text
button 1, (for which the character code is 0041 Hex), send the following command:
SEND_COMMAND TP,"'^UNI-1,0,0041'"
Note: Unicode is always represented in a HEX value. TPD4 generates (through the Text
Enter Box dialog) unicode HEX values. Refer to the TPDesign4 Instruction Manual for
more information.
^VTP
Simulates a
touch/release/
pulse at the given
coordinate.
Syntax:
^VTP-<0=Release, 1=Press, 2=Pulse>,<x>,<y>
Miscellaneous MVP Strings back to the Master
The following two strings are sent by the MVP panel back to the communicating Master:
MVP Strings to Master
undock <master>
This is sent to the target Master when the MVP is undocked.
• If the panel has no information within the User Access Passwords list, ’none’ is sent as
a user.
• If the undock button on the Protected Setup page is used, ’setup’ is sent as a user.
• This string can be disabled from within the firmware setup pages.
dock
This is sent to the target Master when the MVP is docked.
• This string can be disabled from within the firmware setup pages.
126
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Programming
MVP Panel Lock Passcode commands
These commands are used to maintain a passcode list. From certain panels a password must be entered to remove the
panel from its cradle. Only the passcode is entered. The user is just for identifying the passcodes.
MVP Panel Lock Passcode Commands
^LPC
Clear all
users from the
User Access
Passwords list on
the Password
Setup page.
^LPR
Remove a given
user from the User
Access
Passwords list on
the Password
Setup page.
Syntax:
"'^LPC'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^LPC'"
Clear all users from the User Access Password list on the Password Setup page.
Refer to the Password Setup Page section on page 77 for more information.
Syntax:
"'^LPR-<user>'"
Variable:
user = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^LPR-Robert'"
Remove user named ’Robert’ from the User Access Password list on the Password
Setup page. Refer to thePassword Setup Page section on page 77 for more
information.
^LPS
Set the user name
and password.
This command allows you to:
1. Add a new user name and password OR
2. Set the password for a given user.
The user name and password combo is added to the User Access and/or Password list
in the Password Setup page. The user name must be alphanumeric.
Syntax:
"'^LPS-<user>,<passcode>'"
Variable:
user = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
passcode = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^LPS-Manager,undock'"
Sets a new user name as "Manager" and the password to "undock".
Example 2:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^LPS-Manager,test'"
Changes the given user name password to "test".
Refer to thePassword Setup Page section on page 77 for more information.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
127
Programming
Text Effects Names
The following is a listing of text effects names (associated with the ^TEF command on page 125).
Text Effects
• Glow -S
• Medium Drop Shadow 1
• Hard Drop Shadow 1
• Glow -M
• Medium Drop Shadow 2
• Hard Drop Shadow 2
• Glow -L
• Medium Drop Shadow 3
• Hard Drop Shadow 3
• Glow -X
• Medium Drop Shadow 4
• Hard Drop Shadow 4
• Outline -S
• Medium Drop Shadow 5
• Hard Drop Shadow 5
• Outline -M
• Medium Drop Shadow 6
• Hard Drop Shadow 6
• Outline -L
• Medium Drop Shadow 7
• Hard Drop Shadow 7
• Outline -X
• Medium Drop Shadow 8
• Hard Drop Shadow 8
• Soft Drop Shadow 1
• Medium Drop Shadow 1 with
outline
• Hard Drop Shadow 1 with
outline
• Soft Drop Shadow 2
• Medium Drop Shadow 2 with
outline
• Hard Drop Shadow 2 with
outline
• Soft Drop Shadow 3
• Medium Drop Shadow 3 with
outline
• Hard Drop Shadow 3 with
outline
• Soft Drop Shadow 4
• Medium Drop Shadow 4 with
outline
• Hard Drop Shadow 4 with
outline
• Soft Drop Shadow 5
• Medium Drop Shadow 5 with
outline
• Hard Drop Shadow 5 with
outline
• Soft Drop Shadow 6
• Medium Drop Shadow 6 with
outline
• Hard Drop Shadow 6 with
outline
• Soft Drop Shadow 7
• Medium Drop Shadow 7 with
outline
• Hard Drop Shadow 7 with
outline
• Soft Drop Shadow 8
• Medium Drop Shadow 8 with
outline
• Hard Drop Shadow 8 with
outline
• Soft Drop Shadow 1 with
outline
• Soft Drop Shadow 2 with
outline
• Soft Drop Shadow 3 with
outline
• Soft Drop Shadow 4 with
outline
• Soft Drop Shadow 5 with
outline
• Soft Drop Shadow 6 with
outline
• Soft Drop Shadow 7 with
outline
• Soft Drop Shadow 8 with
outline
128
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Programming
Button Query Commands
Button Query commands reply back with a custom event. There will be one custom event for each button/state
combination. Each query is assigned a unique custom event type. The following example is for debug purposes only:
NetLinx Example: CUSTOM_EVENT[device, Address, Custom event type]
DEFINE_EVENT
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1001]
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1002]
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1003]
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1004]
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1005]
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1006]
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1007]
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1008]
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1009]
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1010]
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1011]
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1012]
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1013]
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1014]
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1015]
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
Text
Bitmap
Icon
Text Justification
Bitmap Justification
Icon Justification
Font
Text Effect Name
Text Effect Color
Word Wrap
ON state Border Color
ON state Fill Color
ON state Text Color
Border Name
Opacity
{
Send_String
Send_String
Send_String
Send_String
Send_String
Send_String
Send_String
0,"'ButtonGet Id=',ITOA(CUSTOM.ID),' Type=',ITOA(CUSTOM.TYPE)"
0,"'Flag
=',ITOA(CUSTOM.FLAG)"
0,"'VALUE1 =',ITOA(CUSTOM.VALUE1)"
0,"'VALUE2 =',ITOA(CUSTOM.VALUE2)"
0,"'VALUE3 =',ITOA(CUSTOM.VALUE3)"
0,"'TEXT
=',CUSTOM.TEXT"
0,"'TEXT LENGTH =',ITOA(LENGTH_STRING(CUSTOM.TEXT))"
}
All custom events have the following 6 fields:
Custom Event Fields
Field
Description
Uint Flag
0 means text is a standard string, 1 means Unicode encoded string
slong value1
button state number
slong value2
actual length of string (this is not encoded size)
slong value3
index of first character (usually 1 or same as optional index
string text
the text from the button
text length (string encode)
button text length
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
129
Programming
These fields are populated differently for each query command. The text length (String Encode) field is not used in any
command.
Button Query Commands
?BCB
Syntax:
Get the current
border color.
Variable:
"'?BCB-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
custom event type 1011:
Flag - zero
Value1 - Button state number
Value2 - Actual length of string (should be 9)
Value3 - Zero
Text - Hex encoded color value (ex: #000000FF)
Text length - Color name length (should be 9)
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?BCB-529,1'"
Gets the button 'OFF state' border color. information.
The result sent to the Master would be:
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1011
Flag = 0
VALUE1 = 1
VALUE2 = 9
VALUE3 = 0
TEXT = #222222FF
TEXT LENGTH = 9
?BCF
Syntax:
Get the current fill
color.
Variable:
"'?BCF-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
custom event type 1012:
Flag - Zero
Value1 - Button state number
Value2 - Actual length of string (should be 9)
Value3 - Zero
Text - Hex encoded color value (ex: #000000FF)
Text length - Color name length (should be 9)
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?BCF-529,1'"
Gets the button 'OFF state' fill color information.
The result sent to the Master would be:
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1012
Flag = 0
VALUE1 = 1
VALUE2 = 9
VALUE3 = 0
TEXT = #FF8000FF
TEXT LENGTH = 9
130
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Programming
Button Query Commands (Cont.)
?BCT
Syntax:
Get the current
text color.
Variable:
"'?BCT-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
custom event type 1013:
Flag - Zero
Value1 - Button state number
Value2 - Actual length of string (should be 9)
Value3 - Zero
Text - Hex encoded color value (ex: #000000FF)
Text length - Color name length (should be 9)
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?BCT-529,1'"
Gets the button 'OFF state' text color information.
The result sent to Master would be:
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1013
Flag = 0
VALUE1 = 1
VALUE2 = 9
VALUE3 = 0
TEXT = #FFFFFEFF
TEXT LENGTH = 9
?BMP
Syntax:
Get the current
bitmap name.
Variable:
"'?BMP-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
custom event type 1002:
Flag - Zero
Value1 - Button state number
Value2 - Actual length of string
Value3 - Zero
Text - String that represents the bitmap name
Text length - Bitmap name text length (should be 9)
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?BMP-529,1'"
Gets the button 'OFF state' bitmap information.
The result sent to the Master would be:
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1002
Flag = 0
VALUE1 = 1
VALUE2 = 9
VALUE3 = 0
TEXT = Buggs.png
TEXT LENGTH = 9
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
131
Programming
Button Query Commands (Cont.)
?BOP
Syntax:
Get the overall
button opacity.
Variable:
"'?BOP-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
custom event type 1015:
Flag - Zero
Value1 - Button state number
Value2 - Opacity
Value3 - Zero
Text - Blank
Text length - Zero
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?BOP-529,1'"
Gets the button 'OFF state' opacity information.
The result sent to the Master would be:
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1015
Flag = 0
VALUE1 = 1
VALUE2 = 200
VALUE3 = 0
TEXT =
TEXT LENGTH = 0
?BRD
Syntax:
Get the current
border name.
Variable:
"'?BRD-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
custom event type 1014:
Flag - Zero
Value1 - Button state number
Value2 - Actual length of string
Value3 - Zero
Text - String that represents border name
Text length - Border name length
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?BRD-529,1'"
Gets the button 'OFF state' border information.
The result sent to the Master would be:
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1014
Flag = 0
VALUE1 = 1
VALUE2 = 22
VALUE3 = 0
TEXT = Double Bevel Raised -L
TEXT LENGTH = 22
?BRT
Get the current
panel brightness.
132
Returned in Custom event.
Value1=panel brightness value
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Programming
Button Query Commands (Cont.)
?BWW
Syntax:
Get the current
word wrap flag
status.
Variable:
"'?BWW-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
custom event type 1010:
Flag - Zero
Value1 - Button state number
Value2 - 0 = no word wrap, 1 = word wrap
Value3 - Zero
Text - Blank
Text length - Zero
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?BWW-529,1'"
Gets the button 'OFF state' word wrap flag status information.
The result sent to the Master would be:
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1010
Flag = 0
VALUE1 = 1
VALUE2 = 1
VALUE3 = 0
TEXT =
TEXT LENGTH = 0
?CHR
Get the charging
status.
?FBC
Get the frame
buffer CRC.
Returned in Custom event.
Value1=status(0=not charging,1=charging)
Value2=current (combined) battery level
Returned in Custom event.
Value1=CRC32 calculated on the panel's frame buffer
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
133
Programming
Button Query Commands (Cont.)
?FON
Syntax:
Get the current
font index.
Variable:
"'?FON-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
custom event type 1007:
Flag - Zero
Value1 - Button state number
Value2 - Font index
Value3 - Zero
Text - Blank
Text length - Zero
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?FON-529,1'"
Gets the button 'OFF state' font type index information.
The result sent to the Master would be:
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1007
Flag = 0
VALUE1 = 1
VALUE2 = 72
VALUE3 = 0
TEXT =
TEXT LENGTH = 0
?ICO
Syntax:
Get the current
icon index.
Variable:
"'?ICO-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
custom event type 1003:
Flag - Zero
Value1 - Button state number
Value2 - Icon Index
Value3 - Zero
Text - Blank
Text length - Zero
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?ICO-529,1&2'"
Gets the button 'OFF state' icon index information.
The result sent to the Master would be:
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1003
Flag = 0
VALUE1 = 2
VALUE2 = 12
VALUE3 = 0
TEXT =
TEXT LENGTH = 0
134
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Programming
Button Query Commands (Cont.)
?JSB
Syntax:
Get the current
bitmap
justification.
Variable:
"'?JSB-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
custom event type 1005:
Flag - Zero
Value1 - Button state number
Value2 - 1 - 9 justify
Value3 - Zero
Text - Blank
Text length - Zero
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?JSB-529,1'"
Gets the button 'OFF state' bitmap justification information.
The result sent to the Master would be:
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1005
Flag = 0
VALUE1 = 1
VALUE2 = 5
VALUE3 = 0
TEXT =
TEXT LENGTH = 0
?JSI
Syntax:
Get the current
icon
justification.
Variable:
"'?JSI-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
custom event type 1006:
Flag - Zero
Value1 - Button state number
Value2 - 1 - 9 justify
Value3 - Zero
Text - Blank
Text length - Zero
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?JSI-529,1'"
Gets the button 'OFF state' icon justification information.
The result sent to the Master would be:
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1006
Flag = 0
VALUE1 = 1
VALUE2 = 6
VALUE3 = 0
TEXT =
TEXT LENGTH = 0
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
135
Programming
Button Query Commands (Cont.)
?JST
Syntax:
Get the current
text justification.
Variable:
"'?JST-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
custom event type 1004:
Flag - Zero
Value1 - Button state number
Value2 - 1 - 9 justify
Value3 - Zero
Text - Blank
Text length - Zero
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?JST-529,1'"
Gets the button 'OFF state' text justification information.
The result sent to the Master would be:
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1004
Flag = 0
VALUE1 = 1
VALUE2 = 1
VALUE3 = 0
TEXT =
TEXT LENGTH = 0
?LOG
Get the XML
panel logs.
Returned in MULTIPLE Custom events (size of strings are limited per message). Values
in Custom event displays the number of messages and how many total bytes of xml data.
Value 1 = 1 (which one of multiple events is this (1 based))
Value 2 = 5 (total number of events required to send this string)
Value 3 = total size in bytes of string
Text = XML output (1 of 5)
total XML output resembles:
<?xml version="1.0" ?>
<PanelLogs>
<Log>
<Date>09-04-2008 THU 11:24:07</Date>
<Name>MasterUrlConnect</Name>
<Message>Connected to (Sys=303) Master cjc-master (URL Mode)</
Message>
</Log>
</PanelLogs>
?MCO
Get the
microphone
output level.
?MUT
Get the mute
value.
?PIF
Get the panel file
system, RAM, and
panel start time
information.
136
Returned in Custom event.
Value1=mic out level
Returned in Custom event
Value1=button state(0=off, 1=on)
Returned in Custom event.
Text=<Filesystem Info>,<RAM Info>,<Panel Start Time>
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Programming
Button Query Commands (Cont.)
?STA
Get the XML
panel statistics.
Returned in MULTIPLE Custom events (size of strings are limited per message). Values
in the Custom event displays the number of messages and how many total bytes of xml
data.
Value 1 = 1 (which one of multiple events is this (1 based))
Value 2 = 5 (total number of events required to send this string)
Value 3 = total size in bytes of string
Text = XML output (1 of 5)
total XML output looks like:
<?xml version="1.0" ?>
<PanelStats>
<Icsp>
<Total><Rx>11</Rx><Proc>11</Proc><Drop>0</Drop></Total>
<Rolling><Rx>11</Rx><Proc>11</Proc><Drop>0</Drop></Rolling>
</Icsp>
<Blink>
<Total><Rx>3</Rx><Miss>0</Miss></Total>
<Rolling><Rx>3</Rx><Miss>0</Miss></Rolling>
</Blink>
<Ethernet>
<RxPackets>53063571</RxPackets><RxErrors>0</RxErrors>
<RxDrops>0</RxDrops><RxOverRuns>0</RxOverRuns><RxFrames>63</RxFrames>
<TxPackets>17842136</TxPackets><TxErrors>0</TxErrors><TxDrops>0</
TxDrops>
<TxOverRuns>0</TxOverRuns><TxCarriers>0</TxCarriers>
<Collisions>0</Collisions><TxQueueLen>100</TxQueueLen>
<RxBytes>292901735</RxBytes><TxBytes>1182103211</TxBytes>
</Ethernet>
<Wireless>
<Mode>Managed</Mode><Frequenc
?STO
Get the shutdown
timeout value.
Returned in Custom event.
Value1=shutdown timeout value (in minutes)
?TEC
Syntax:
Get the current
text effect color.
Variable:
"'?TEC-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
custom event type 1009:
Flag - Zero
Value1 - Button state number
Value2 - Actual length of string (should be 9)
Value3 - Zero
Text - Hex encoded color value (ex: #000000FF)
Text length - Color name length (should be 9)
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?TEC-529,1'"
Gets the button 'OFF state' text effect color information.
The result sent to the Master would be:
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1009
Flag = 0
VALUE1 = 1
VALUE2 = 9
VALUE3 = 0
TEXT = #5088F2AE
TEXT LENGTH = 9
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
137
Programming
Button Query Commands (Cont.)
?TEF
Syntax:
Get the current
text effect name.
Variable:
"'?TEF-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
custom event type 1008:
Flag - Zero
Value1 - Button state number
Value2 - Actual length of string
Value3 - Zero
Text - String that represents the text effect name
Text length - Text effect name length
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?TEF-529,1'"
Gets the button 'OFF state' text effect name information.
The result sent to the Master would be:
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1008
Flag = 0
VALUE1 = 1
VALUE2 = 18
VALUE3 = 0
TEXT = Hard Drop Shadow 3
TEXT LENGTH = 18
?TXT
Syntax:
Get the current
text information.
Variable:
"'?TXT-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<optional index>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
optional index = This is used if a string was too long to get back in one command.
The reply will start at this index.
custom event type 1001:
Flag - Zero
Value1 - Button state number
Value2 - Actual length of string
Value3 - Index
Text - Text from the button
Text length - Button text length
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?TXT-529,1'"
Gets the button 'OFF state' text information.
The result sent to the Master would be:
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1001
Flag = 0
VALUE1 = 1
VALUE2 = 14
VALUE3 = 1
TEXT = This is a test
TEXT LENGTH = 14
138
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Programming
Button Query Commands (Cont.)
?WIF
Get the wireless
network
information.
Returned in Custom event.
Text=<WAP MAC address>,<SSID>,<Channel #>,<Signal Level Value>
Panel Runtime Operations
Serial Commands are used in the AxcessX Terminal Emulator mode. These commands are case insensitive.
Panel Runtime Operation Commands
ABEEP
Syntax:
Output a single
beep even if beep
is Off.
Example:
"'ABEEP'"
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'ABEEP'"
Outputs a beep of duration 1 beep even if beep is Off.
ADBEEP
Syntax:
Output a double
beep even if beep
is Off.
Example:
"'ADBEEP'"
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'ADBEEP'"
Outputs a double beep even if beep is Off.
Keyboard string is set to null on power up and is stored until power is lost. The Prompt
Text is optional.
Pop up the
keyboard icon and Syntax:
initialize the text
"'@AKB-<initial text>;<prompt text>'"
string to that
Variables:
specified.
@AKB
initial text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
prompt text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@AKB-Texas;Enter State'"
Pops up the Keyboard and initializes the text string 'Texas' with prompt text 'Enter State'.
AKEYB
Keyboard string is set to null on power up and is stored until power is lost.
Syntax:
Pop up the
keyboard icon and
"'AKEYB-<initial text>'"
initialize the text
Variables:
string to that
initial text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
specified.
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'AKEYB-This is a Test'"
Pops up the Keyboard and initializes the text string 'This is a Test'.
AKEYP
The keypad string is set to null on power up and is stored until power is lost.
Pop up the
keypad icon and
initialize the text
string to that
specified.
Syntax:
"'AKEYP-<number string>'"
Variables:
number string = 0 - 9999.
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'AKEP-12345'"
Pops up the Keypad and initializes the text string '12345'.
AKEYR
Remove the
Keyboard/
Keypad.
Remove keyboard or keypad that was displayed using 'AKEYB', 'AKEYP', 'PKEYP',
@AKB, @AKP, @PKP, @EKP, or @TKP commands.
Syntax:
"'AKEYR'"
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'AKEYR'"
Removes the Keyboard/Keypad.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
139
Programming
Panel Runtime Operation Commands (Cont.)
@AKP
Pop up the
keypad icon and
initialize the text
string to that
specified.
Keypad string is set to null on power up and is stored until power is lost. The Prompt Text
is optional.
Syntax:
"'@AKP-<initial text>;<prompt text>'"
Variables:
initial text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
prompt text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@AKP-12345678;ENTER PASSWORD'"
Pops up the Keypad and initializes the text string '12345678' with prompt text ’ENTER
PASSWORD’.
@AKR
Remove the
Keyboard/
Keypad.
Remove keyboard or keypad that was displayed using 'AKEYB', 'AKEYP', 'PKEYP',
@AKB, @AKP, @PKP, @EKP, or @TKP commands.
Syntax:
"'@AKR'"
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@AKR'"
Removes the Keyboard/Keypad.
BEEP
Output a beep.
Syntax:
"'BEEP'"
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'BEEP'"
Outputs a beep.
BRIT
Syntax:
Set the panel
brightness.
Variable:
"'BRIT-<brightness level>'"
brightness level = 0 - 100.
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'BRIT-50'"
Sets the brightness level to 50.
@BRT
Syntax:
Set the panel
brightness.
Variable:
"'@BRT-<brightness level>'"
brightness level = 0 - 100.
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@BRT-70'"
Sets the brightness level to 70.
DBEEP
Syntax:
Output a
double beep.
Example:
"'DBEEP'"
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'DBEEP'"
Outputs a double beep.
@EKP
Extend the
Keypad.
Pops up the keypad icon and initializes the text string to that specified. The Prompt Text is
optional.
Syntax:
"'@EKP-<initial text>;<prompt text>'"
Variables:
initial text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
prompt text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@EKP-33333333;Enter Password'"
Pops up the Keypad and initializes the text string '33333333' with prompt text 'Enter
Password'.
140
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Programming
Panel Runtime Operation Commands (Cont.)
PKEYP
Present a private
keypad.
Pops up the keypad icon and initializes the text string to that specified. Keypad displays a
'*' instead of the numbers typed. The Prompt Text is optional.
Syntax:
"'PKEYP-<initial text>'"
Variables:
initial text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'PKEYP-123456789'"
Pops up the Keypad and initializes the text string '123456789' in '*'.
@PKP
Present a private
keypad.
Pops up the keypad icon and initializes the text string to that specified. Keypad displays a
'*' instead of the numbers typed. The Prompt Text is optional.
Syntax:
"'@PKP-<initial text>;<prompt text>'"
Variables:
initial text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
prompt text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@PKP-1234567;ENTER PASSWORD'"
Pops up the Keypad and initializes the text string 'ENTER PASSWORD' in '*'.
SETUP
Syntax:
Send panel to
SETUP page.
Example:
"'SETUP'"
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'SETUP'"
Sends the panel to the Setup Page.
SHUTDOWN
Syntax:
"'SHUTDOWN'"
Shut down the
batteries providing Example:
power to the
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'SHUTDOWN'"
panel.
Shuts-down the batteries feeding power to the panel. This function saves the battery from
discharging.
SLEEP
Syntax:
Force the panel
into screen saver
mode.
Example:
"'SLEEP'"
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'SLEEP'"
Forces the panel into screen saver mode.
@SOU
Play a sound file.
Syntax:
"'@SOU-<sound name>'"
Variables:
sound name = Name of the sound file. Supported sound file formats are:
WAV & MP3.
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@SOU-Music.wav'"
Plays the 'Music.wav' file.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
141
Programming
Panel Runtime Operation Commands (Cont.)
@TKP
Present a
telephone
keypad.
Pops up the keypad icon and initializes the text string to that specified. The Prompt Text is
optional.
Syntax:
"'@TKP-<initial text>;<prompt text>'"
Variables:
initial text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
prompt text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@TKP-999.222.1211;Enter Phone Number'"
Pops-up the Keypad and initializes the text string '999.222.1211' with prompt text 'Enter
Phone Number'.
TPAGEON
Turn On page
tracking.
This command turns On page tracking, whereby when the page or popups change, a
string is sent to the Master. This string may be captured with a CREATE_BUFFER
command for one panel and sent directly to another panel.
Syntax:
"'TPAGEON'"
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'TPAGEON'"
Turns On page tracking.
TPAGEOFF
Syntax:
Turn Off page
tracking.
Example:
"'TPAGEOFF'"
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'TPAGEOFF'"
Turns Off page tracking.
@VKB
Syntax:
Popup the
virtual
keyboard.
Example:
"'@VKB'"
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@VKB'"
Pops-up the virtual keyboard.
WAKE
Syntax:
Force the panel
out of screen
saver mode.
Example:
"'WAKE'"
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'WAKE'"
Forces the panel out of the screen saver mode.
142
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Programming
Input Commands
These Send Commands are case insensitive.
Input Commands
^CAL
Syntax:
Put panel in
calibration mode.
Example:
"'^CAL'"
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^CAL'"
Puts the panel in calibration mode.
^KPS
Syntax:
Set the
keyboard
passthru.
Variable:
"'^KPS-<pass data>'"
pass data:
<blank/empty> = Disables the keyboard.
0 = Pass data to G4 application (default). This can be used with VPC or text areas.
1 - 4 = Not used.
5 = Sends out data to the Master.
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^KPS-5'"
Sets the keyboard passthru to the Master. Option 5 sends keystrokes directly to the
Master via the Send Output String mechanism. This process sends a virtual keystroke
command (^VKS) to the Master.
Example 2:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^KPS-0'"
Disables the keyboard passthru to the Master.
The following point defines how the parameters within this command work:
• Accepts keystrokes from any of these sources: attached USB keyboard or Virtual
keyboard.
^VKS
Send one or more
virtual key strokes
to the G4
application.
Key presses and key releases are not distinguished except in the case of CTRL, ALT, and
SHIFT.
Refer to theEmbedded Codes table on page 144 that define special characters which
can be included with the string but may not be represented by the ASCII character set.
Syntax:
"'^VKS-<string>'"
Variable:
string = Only 1 string per command/only one stroke per command.
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^VKS-'8"
Sends out the keystroke 'backspace' to the G4 application.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
143
Programming
Embedded codes
The following is a list of G4 compatible embedded codes:
Embedded Codes
Decimal numbers Hexidecimal values
144
Virtual keystroke
8
($08)
Backspace
13
($0D)
Enter
27
($1B)
ESC
128
($80)
CTRL key down
129
($81)
ALT key down
130
($82)
Shift key down
131
($83)
F1
132
($84)
F2
133
($85)
F3
134
($86)
F4
135
($87)
F5
136
($88)
F6
137
($89)
F7
138
($8A)
F8
139
($8B)
F9
140
($8C)
F10
141
($8D)
F11
142
($8E)
F12
143
($8F)
Num Lock
144
($90)
Caps Lock
145
($91)
Insert
146
($92)
Delete
147
($93)
Home
148
($94)
End
149
($95)
Page Up
150
($96)
Page Down
151
($97)
Scroll Lock
152
($98)
Pause
153
($99)
Break
154
($9A)
Print Screen
155
($9B)
SYSRQ
156
($9C)
Tab
157
($9D)
Windows
158
($9E)
Menu
159
($9F)
Up Arrow
160
($A0)
Down Arrow
161
($A1)
Left Arrow
162
($A2)
Right Arrow
192
($C0)
CTRL key up
193
($C1)
ALT key up
194
($C2)
Shift key up
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Programming
Panel Setup Commands
These commands are case insensitive.
Panel Setup Commands
^MUT
Syntax:
Set the panel
mute state.
Variable:
"'^MUT-<mute state>'"
mute state= 0 = Mute Off and 1 = Mute On.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^MUT-1''"
Sets the panel’s master volume to mute.
@PWD
@PWD sets the level 1 password only.
Set the page flip
password.
Syntax:
"'@PWD-<page flip password>'"
Variables:
page flip password = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@PWD-Main'"
Sets the page flip password to 'Main'.
^PWD
Password level is required and must be 1 - 4.
Set the page flip
password.
Syntax:
"'^PWD-<password level>,<page flip password>'"
Variables:
password level = 1 - 4.
page flip password = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^PWD-1,Main'"
Sets the page flip password on Password Level 1 to 'Main'.
^VOL
Syntax:
Set the panel
volume.
Variable:
"'^VOL-<volume level>'"
volume level = 0 - 100. 100 is maximum volume setting.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^VOL-50'"
Set the panel volume to 50.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
145
Programming
Dynamic Image Commands
The following table describes Dynamic Image Commands.
Dynamic Image Commands
^BBR
Set the bitmap of
a button to use a
particular
resource.
Syntax:
"'^BBR-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<resource name>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
resource name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BBR-700,1,Sports_Image'"
Sets the resource name of the button to ’Sports_Image’.
^RAF
Adds any and all resource parameters by sending embedded codes and data.
Add new
resources.
Since the embedded codes are preceded by a '%' character, any '%' character contained
in the URL must be escaped with a second '%' character (see example).
The file name field (indicated by a %F embedded code) may contain special escape
sequences as shown in the ^RAF, ^RMF - Embedded Codes table below.
Syntax:
"'^RAF-<resource name>,<data>'"
Variables:
• resource name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
• data = Refers to the embedded codes, see the ^RAF, ^RMF - Embedded Codes section
on page 147.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^RAF-New Image,%P0%HAMX.COM%ALab/
Test%%5Ffile%Ftest.jpg'"
Adds a new resource.
• The resource name is ’New Image’
• %P (protocol) is an HTTP
• %H (host name) is AMX.COM
• %A (file path) is Lab/Test_file
• %F (file name) is test.jpg.
Note that the %%5F in the file path is actually encoded as %5F.
^RFR
Syntax:
"'^RFR-<resource name>'"
Force a refresh for
a given resource. Variable:
resource name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^RFR-Sports_Image'"
Forces a refresh on ’Sports_Image’.
146
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Programming
Dynamic Image Commands (Cont.)
^RMF
Modifies any and all resource parameters by sending embedded codes and data.
Modify an
existing resource.
Since the embedded codes are preceded by a '%' character, any '%' character contained
in the URL must be escaped with a second '%' character (see example).
The file name field (indicated by a %F embedded code) may contain special escape
sequences as shown in the ^RAF, ^RMF - Embedded Codes section on page 147.
Syntax:
"'^RMF-<resource name>,<data>'"
Variables:
• resource name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters
• data = Refers to the embedded codes, see the ^RAF, ^RMF - Embedded Codes section
on page 147.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^RMF-Sports_Image,%ALab%%5FTest/
Images%Ftest.jpg'"
Changes the resource ’Sports_Image’ file name to ’test.jpg’ and the path to ’Lab_Test/
Images’.
Note that the %%5F in the file path is actually encoded as %5F.
^RSR
Syntax:
Change the
refresh rate for a
given resource.
Variable:
"'^RSR-<resource name>,<refresh rate>'"
resource name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
refresh rate = Measured in seconds.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^RSR-Sports_Image,5'"
Sets the refresh rate to 5 seconds for the given resource (’Sports_Image’).
^RAF, ^RMF - Embedded Codes
The ^RAF and ^RMF commands add and modify any and all resource parameters by sending embedded codes and data:
"'^RAF-<resource name>,<data>'"
"'^RMF-<resource name>,<data>'"
The <data> variable uses the embedded codes described in the following table:
^RAF, ^RMF - Embedded Codes
Parameter Embedded Code
Description
protocol
’%P <0-1>’
Set protocol. HTTP (0) or FTP (1).
user
’%U <user>’
Set Username for authentication.
password
’%S <password>’
Set Password for authentication.
host
’%H <host>’
Set Host Name (fully qualified DNS or IP Address).
file
’%F <file>’
Full path to the location of the file or program that will return
the resource. The path must be a valid HTTP URL minus the
protocol and host.
The only exception to this is the inclusion of special escape
sequences and in the case of FTP protocol, regular
expressions.
path
’%A <path>’
Set Directory path. The path must be a valid HTTP URL minus
the protocol, host and filename.
The only exception to this is the inclusion of special escape
sequences and in the case of FTP protocol, regular
expressions.
refresh
’%R <refresh 1-65535>’
The number of seconds between refreshes in which the
resource is downloaded again. Refreshing a resource causes
the button displaying that resource to refresh also.
The default value is 0 (only download the resource once).
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
147
Programming
^RAF, ^RMF - Embedded Codes (Cont.)
Parameter Embedded Code
Description
newest
Set the newest file. A value of 1 means that only the most
recent file matching the pattern is downloaded.
’%N <0-1>’
Note: The 'newest file' option only applies to FTP Dynamic
Images, and only those that have pattern matching as part of
their filename. Neither 'newest file' nor pattern matching apply
to HTTP Dynamic Images.
When set, the panel will first pull a list of files matching the
given pattern from the specified FTP server and path. The
timestamps of the items in the list will be compared, with the
newest one being displayed on the panel. This is useful for
source devices that place a uniquely named still image in a
folder at constant intervals, allowing the panel always to
display the most recent one.
preserve
’%V <0-1>’
Set the value of the preserve flag.
Default is 0. Currently preserve has no function.
Escape Sequences
The ^RAF and ^RMF commands support the replacement of any special escape sequences in the filename (specified by
the %F embedded code) with the corresponding data obtained from the system as outlined in the table below:
Escape Sequences
Sequence Panel Information
$DV
Device Number
$SY
System Number
$IP
IP Address
$HN
Host Name
$MC
Mac Address
$ID
Neuron ID (Only supported on panels that use ICSNet; ignored on all other panels)
$PX
X resolution of current panel mode/file
$PY
Y resolution of current panel mode/file
$ST
Current state
$AC
Address code
$AP
Address port
$CC
Channel code
$CP
Channel port
$LC
Level code
$LP
Level port
$BX
X Resolution of Current button
$BY
Y Resolution of Current button
$BN
Name of Button
For instance, http://www.amx.com/img.asp?device=$DV
would become
http://www.amx.com/img.asp?device=10001.
148
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Programming
Intercom Commands
The following is a list of Intercom Commands:
Intercom Commands
^MODEL?
Panel model name. If the panel supports intercom hardware it will respond with its model
Sets model name. name as shown in the response below. Older hardware or newer hardware that has
intercom support disabled with not respond to this command.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'^MODEL?'"
Variables:
None.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND TP1,"'^MODEL?'"
Panel response string if intercom enabled:
^MODEL-MVP-8400i
^ICS-
^ICS-<IP>,<TX UDP port>,<RX UDP port>,<initial mode>'"
Intercom start.
Intercom start. Starts a call to the specified IP address and ports, where initial mode is
either 1 (talk) or 0 (listen) or 2 (both). If no mode is specified 0 (listen) is assumed. Please
note, however, that no data packets will actually flow until the intercom modify command is
sent to the panel.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'^ICS-<IP>,<TX UDP port>,<RX UDP port>,<initial
mode>'"
Variables:
IP = IP Address of panel to connect with on an Intercom call.
TX UDP port = UDP port to transmit to.
RX UDP port = UDP port to receive from.
initial mode = 0 (listen) or 1 (talk) or 2 (handsfree). 0 is the default.
Examples:
Example of setting up a handsfree unicast call between two panels:
send_command TP1, "^ICS-192.168.0.3,9000,9002,2"
send_command TP2, "^ICS-192.168.0.4,9002,9000,2"
Example of setting up a multicast call where the first panel is paging two other panels:
send_command TP1, "^ICS-239.252.1.1,9002,9000,1"
send_command TP2, "^ICS-239.252.1.1,9002,9000,0"
send_command TP3, "^ICS-239.252.1.1,9002,9000,0"
Example of setting up a baby monitor call where the first panel is listening to the
microphone audio coming from the second panel:
send_command TP1, "^ICS-192.168.0.3,9000,9002,0"
send_command TP2, "^ICS-192.168.0.4,9002,9000,1"
^ICE'
Intercom end. This terminates an intercom call/connection.
Intercom end.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'^ICE'"
Variables:
None
Example:
SEND_COMMAND TP1,"'^ICE'"
SEND_COMMAND TP2,"'^ICE'"
Terminates an intercom call between two panels.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
149
Programming
Intercom Commands (Cont.)
^ICM-TALK
Intercom modify command. For backwards compatibility both versions are supported.
^ICM-LISTEN
In this release, however, the TALK and LISTEN subcommands are ignored. The
microphone and/or speaker are activated based on the initial mode value of the intercom
start command and the audio data packet flow is started upon receipt of this command by
the panel.
Intercom modify
command.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'^ICM-TALK'"
Variables:
None.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND TP1,"'^ICM-TALK'"
^ICM-MUTEMIC
Set the state of
the microphone
on a panel to
muted (1) or
unmuted (0). At
the start of each
call the
microphone starts
out unmuted.
Syntax:
"'^ICM-MUTEMIC,<state>'"
Variables:
0 - unmuted
1 - muted
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel, “^ICM-MUTEMIC,1”
Sets the microphone to muted.
SIP Commands
The following table lists and describes SIP commands that are generated from the touch panel.
SIP Commands
^PHNAUTOANSWER
Syntax:
"'^PHN-AUTOANSWER, <state>'"
Provides the state Variable:
of the
state = 0 or 1 (off or on)
auto-answer
Example:
feature.
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^PHN-AUTOANSWER, 1'"
^PHN-CALL
Provides call
progress
notification for a
call.
Syntax:
"'^PHN-CALL, <status>, <connection id>'"
Variable:
status = CONNECTED, DISCONNECTED, TRYING, RINGING, or HOLD.
connection id = The identifying number of the connection.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel"'^PHN-CALL, CONNECTED, 1'"
Notifies that the call is connected.
^PHN-INCOMING Provides incoming call notification and the connection id used for all future commands
Provides incoming related to this call. The connection id will be 0 or 1.
call notification.
Syntax:
"'^PHN-INCOMING, <caller number>, <caller name>, <connection id>,
<timestamp>, '"
Variable:
caller number = The phone number of the incoming call.
caller name = The name associated with the caller number.
connection id = The identifying number of the connection.
timestamp = The current time in MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS format.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^PHN-INCOMING, 2125551000, AMX, 07/22/08
12:00:00, 1'"
150
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Programming
SIP Commands (Cont.)
^PHNLINESTATE
Indicates the
current state of
each of the
available
connections used
to manage calls.
Syntax:
"'^PHN-LINESTATE, <connection id>, <state>, <connection id>,
<state>,...'"
Variable:
connection id = The identifying number of the connection.
state = IDLE, HOLD, or CONNECTED
extn = The local extension of this panel (see Example)
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^PHN-LINESTATE, 1, IDLE, 2, CONNECTED, SIP,
<extn>'"
^PHNMSGWAITING
Indicates the
number of
messages waiting
the user’s voice
mail box.
Syntax:
"'^PHN-MSGWAITING, <messages>, <new message count>, <old message
count>, <new urgent message count>, <old urgent message count>'"
Variable:
messages = 0 or 1 (1 indicates new messages)
new message count = The number of new messages.
old message count = The number of old messages.
new urgent message count = The number of new messages marked urgent.
old urgent message count = The number of old messages marked urgent.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^PHN-MSGWAITING, 1, 1, 2, 1, 0’"
^PHN-PRIVACY
Syntax:
"'^PHN-PRIVACY, <state>'"
Indicates the state
of the privacy
Variable:
feature.
state = 0 (Disable) or 1 (Enable)
new message count = The number of new messages.
old message count = The number of old messages.
new urgent message count = The number of new messages marked urgent.
old urgent message count = The number of old messages marked urgent.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^PHN-PRIVACY, 0’"
^PHN-REDIAL
Syntax:
Indicates the
panel is redialing
the number.
Variable:
"'^PHN-REDIAL, <number>'"
number = The phone number to dial.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^PHN-REDIAL, 2125551000’"
^PHNTRANSFERRED
Syntax:
Indicates a call
has been
transferred.
Example:
"'^PHN-TRANSFERRED'"
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^PHN-TRANSFERRED’"
The following table lists and describes SIP commands that are sent to the touch panel to manage calls.
SIP Commands
^PHN-ANSWER
Answers the call.
Syntax:
"'^PHN-ANSWER, <connection id>'"
Variable:
connection id = The identifying number of the connection
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^PHN-ANSWER, 1'"
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
151
Programming
SIP Commands (Cont.)
^PHNAUTOANSWER
Enables or
disables the
auto-answer
feature of the
phone.
Enables (1) or disables (0) the auto-answer feature on the phone.
Syntax:
"’^PHN-AUTOANSWER, <state>’"
Variable:
state = 0 (Disable) or 1 (Enable)
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^PHN-AUTOANSWER, 1'"
Enables the auto-answer feature.
?PHNAUTOANSWER
The panel responds with the ^PHN-AUTOANSWER, <state> message.
Syntax:
Queries the state
of the
auto-answer
feature.
Example:
^PHN-CALL
Syntax:
"’?PHN-AUTOANSWER’"
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'?PHN-AUTOANSWER'"
"’^PHN-CALL, <number>’"
Calls the provided
number.
Variable:
number = The provided phone number
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^PHN-CALL, 2125551000'"
^PHN-DTMF
Syntax:
Sends DTMF
codes.
Variable:
"’^PHN-DTMF, <DTMF code>’"
DTMF code = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, POUND, or ASTERISK.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^PHN-DTMF, 1234567879ASTERISK'"
^PHN-HANGUP
Hangs up the call.
Syntax:
"’^PHN-HANGUP, <connection id>’"
Variable:
connection id = The identifying number of the connection
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^PHN-HANGUP, 1'"
^PHN-HOLD
Syntax:
Places the call on
hold.
Variable:
"’^PHN-HOLD, <connection id>’"
connection id = The identifying number of the connection
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^PHN-HOLD, 1'"
?PHNLINESTATE
The panel responds with the ^PHN-LINESTATE message.
^PHN-PRIVACY
Enables or disables the privacy feature on the phone (do not disturb).
Enables or
disables the
privacy feature of
the phone.
Syntax:
Syntax:
Queries the state
"’?PHN-LINESTATE’"
of each of the
Example:
connections used
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'?PHN-LINESTATE'"
by the SIP device.
"’^PHN-PRIVACY, <state>’"
Variable:
state = 0 (Disable) or 1 (Enable)
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^PHN-PRIVACY, 1'"
Enables the privacy feature.
152
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Programming
SIP Commands (Cont.)
?PHN-PRIVACY
The panel responds with the ^PHN-PRIVACY, <state> message.
Queries the state
of the privacy
feature.
Syntax:
"’?PHN-PRIVACY’"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'?PHN-PRIVACY'"
^PHN-REDIAL
Syntax:
Redials the last
number.
Example:
"’^PHN-REDIAL’"
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^PHN-REDIAL'"
^PHNTRANSFER
Syntax:
Transfers the call
to the provided
number.
Variable:
"’^PHN-TRANSFER, <connection id>, <number>’"
connection id = The identifying number of the connection
number = The number to which you want to transfer the call.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^PHN-TRANSFER, 1, 2125551000'"
The following table lists and describes SIP setup commands. Using any of these commands causes the current user to go
offline.
SIP Setup Commands
^PHN-SETUPDOMAIN
Syntax:
Sets the realm for
authentication.
Variable:
"’^PHN-SETUP-DOMAIN, <domain>’"
domain = The realm used for authentication
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"’^PHN-SETUP-DOMAIN, asterisk’"
^PHN-SETUPENABLE
Once the configuration has been updated, the ENABLE command should be run to
re-register the new user.
Registers a new
user
Syntax:
^PHN-SETUPPASSWORD
Syntax:
Sets the user
password for the
proxy server.
Variable:
"’^PHN-SETUP-ENABLE’"
"’^PHN-SETUP-PASSWORD, <password>’"
password = The password for the user name
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"’^PHN-SETUP-PASSWORD, 6003’"
^PHN-SETUPPORT
Syntax:
Sets the port
number for the
proxy server.
Variable:
"’^PHN-SETUP-PORT, <port>’"
port = The port for the proxy server
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"’^PHN-SETUP-PORT, 5060’"
^PHN-SETUPPROXYADDR
Syntax:
Sets the IP
address for the
proxy server.
Variable:
"’^PHN-SETUP-PROXYADDR, <IP>’"
IP = The IP address for the proxy server
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"’^PHN-SETUP-PROXYADDR, 192.168.223.111’"
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
153
Programming
SIP Commands (Cont.)
^PHN-SETUPSTUNADDR
Syntax:
Sets the IP
address for the
STUN server.
Variable:
"’^PHN-SETUP-STUNADDR, <IP>’"
IP = The IP address for the STUN server
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"’^PHN-SETUP-STUNADDR, 192.168.223.111’"
154
^PHN-SETUPUSERNAME
Syntax:
Sets the user
name for
authentication
with the proxy
server.
Variable:
"’^PHN-SETUP-USERNAME, <username>’"
username = The user name (usually the phone extension)
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"’^PHN-SETUP-USERNAME, 6003’"
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Panel Calibration
Panel Calibration
This section outlines the steps for calibrating the touch panel. It is recommended that you calibrate the panel both before
its initial use and after completing a firmware download.
Modero panels are factory setup with specific demo touch panel pages. The first splash screen that appears indicates the
panel is receiving power, beginning to load firmware, and preparing to display the default touch panel pages. When the
panel is ready, the AMX Splash Screen is replaced by the Initial Panel Page (FIG. 87).
AMX Splash Screen
(appears during power-up)
Initial Panel Page
(AMX Logo Page)
FIG. 87 AMX splash screen and initial Panel Page
Calibrating the MVP Panels
1. Press and hold the two lower external pushbuttons on both sides of the MVP (FIG. 88) for
6 seconds to pass-over the Setup page and access the Calibration setup page (FIG. 89).
Setup Access buttons
(bottom button on each side)
3 second press/hold of both buttons:
Opens the Setup page
6 second press/hold of both buttons:
Opens the Calibration page
FIG. 88 Location of Setup Access buttons
2. Using the included stylus, press the crosshairs (on the Calibration page) to set the calibration points on the LCD
(FIG. 89).
3. After the "Calibration Successful." message appears, press anywhere on the screen to continue and return to the
Setup page.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
155
Panel Calibration
The request to touch the crosshairs
is the first on-screen message
Calibration successful is the second
on-screen message that appears
after the calibration process is
completed
On-screen crosshairs used for
calibration of the touch device
FIG. 89 Touch Panel Calibration Screens
If the calibration was improperly set and you cannot return to the Calibration
page (through the panel’s firmware); you can then access this firmware page via
G4 WebControl where you can navigate to the Protected Setup page and press the
Calibrate button through your VNC window.
This action causes the panel to go to the Calibration page seen above, where you
can physically recalibrate the actual touch panel again using the above procedures.
Testing your Calibration
1. Press and hold down the on-screen Calibration button for 6 seconds to enter the Calibration Test page (FIG. 90).
On-screen crosshairs is used to
verify a proper calibration of the
panel
FIG. 90 Calibration Test page
2. Press anywhere on this page to confirm the on-screen crosshairs match your touch points.
3. If the crosshairs do not appear directly below your LCD touch points, press the Back button and recalibrate the
panel using the above steps.
Peel the protective plastic film from the LCD.
If the protective plastic film on the LCD is not removed, the panel may not respond
properly to touch points on the LCD nor allow proper screen calibration.
4. Exit this Calibration Test page by pressing the Back button to return to the Protected Setup page.
If Calibration Is Not Working
Cycling power to the panel should provide a baseline calibration for the particular touch panel. Re-calibrate the panel.
156
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Appendix A: Text Formatting
Appendix A: Text Formatting
Text Formatting Codes for Bargraphs/Joysticks
Text formatting codes for bargraphs provide a mechanism to allow a portion of a bargraphs text to be dynamically
provided information about the current status of the level (multistate and traditional). These codes are entered into the
text field along with any other text.
The following is a code list used for bargraphs:
Bargraph Text Code Inputs
Code
Bargraph
Multi-State Bargraph
$P
Display the current percentage of the
bargraph (derived from the Adjusted
Level Value as it falls between the
Range Values)
Display the current percentage of the
bargraph (derived from the Adjusted
Level Value as it falls between the
Range Values)
$V
Raw Level Value
Raw Level Value
$L
Range Low Value
Range Low Value
$H
Range High Value
Range High Value
$S
N/A
Current State
$A
Adjusted Level Value (Range Low Value Adjusted Level Value (Range Low Value
subtracted from the Raw Level Value)
subtracted from the Raw Level Value)
$R
Low Range subtracted from the High
Range
Low Range subtracted from the High
Range
$$
Dollar sign
Dollar sign
By changing the text on a button (via a VT command), you can modify the codes on a button. When one of the Text
Formatting Codes is encountered by the firmware, it is replaced with the correct value. These values are derived from the
following operations:
Formatting Code Operations
Code
Operation
$P
(Current Value - Range Low Value / Range High Value - Range Low Value) x 100
$V
Current Level Value
$L
Range Low Value
$H
Range High Value
$S
Current State (if regular bargraph then resolves to nothing)
$A
Current Value - Range Low Value
$R
Range High Value - Range Low Value
Given a current raw level value of 532, a range low value of 500, and a high range value of 600, the following text
formatting codes would yield the following strings as shown in the table below:
Example
Format
Display
$P%
32%
$A out of $R
32 out of 100
$A of 0 - $R
32 of 0 - 100
$V of $L - $H
532 of 500 - 600
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
157
Appendix A: Text Formatting
Text Area Input Masking
Text Area Input Masking may be used to limit the allowed/correct characters that are entered into a text area. For
example, in working with a zip code, a user could limit the entry to a max length of only 5 characters; with input
masking, this limit could be changed to 5 mandatory numerical digits and 4 optional numerical digits. A possible use for
this feature is to enter information into form fields. The purpose of this feature is to:
• Force the use of correct type of characters (i.e. numbers vs. characters)
• Limit the number of characters in a text area
• Suggest proper format with fixed characters
• Right to Left
• Required or Optional
• Change/Force a Case
• Create multiple logical fields
• Specify range of characters/number for each field
With this feature, it is not necessary to:
• Limit the user to a choice of selections
• Handle complex input tasks such as names, days of the week, or month by name
• Perform complex validation such as Subnet Mask validation
Input mask character types
These character types define what information is allowed to be entered in any specific instance. The following table lists
what characters in an input mask will define what characters are allowed in any given position.
Character Types
Character Masking Rule
0
Digit (0 to 9, entry required, plus [+] and minus [-] signs not allowed)
9
Digit or space (entry not required, plus and minus signs not allowed)
#
Digit or space (entry not required; plus and minus signs allowed)
L
Letter (A to Z, entry required)
?
Letter (A to Z, entry optional)
A
Letter or digit (entry required)
a
Letter or digit (entry optional)
&
Any character or a space (entry required)
C
Any character or a space (entry optional)
The number of the above characters used determines the length of the input masking
box. Example: 0000 requires an entry, requires digits to be used, and allows only 4
characters to be entered/used.
Refer to the following SEND_COMMANDs for more detailed information:
• ^BIM - Sets the input mask for the specified addresses. (see the ^BIM section on
page 111).
• ^BMF subcommand %MK - sets the input mask of a text area (see the
^BMF section on page 113).
158
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Appendix A: Text Formatting
Input Mask Ranges
These ranges allow a user to specify the minimum and maximum numeric value for a field. Only one range is allowed
per field. Using a range implies a numeric entry ONLY.
Input Mask Ranges
Character Meaning
[
Start range
]
End range
|
Range Separator
An example from the above table:
[0|255] This allows a user to enter a value from 0 to 255.
Input mask next field characters
These characters allow you to specify a list of characters that cause the keyboard to move the focus to the next field when
pressed, instead of inserting the text into the text area.
Input Mask Next Field Char
Character Meaning
{
Start Next Field List
}
End Next Field List
An example from the above table:
{.} or {:} or {.:} Proceed to the next text area input box after a user hits any of these keys.
Input mask operations
Input Mask Operators change the behavior of the field in the following way:
Input Mask Operators
Character Meaning
<
Forces all characters to be converted to lowercase
>
Forces all characters to be converted to uppercase
^
Sets the overflow flag for this field
Input mask literals
To define a literal character, enter any character, other than those shown in the above table (including spaces, and
symbols). A back-slash ('\') causes the character that follows it to be displayed as the literal character. For example, \A is
displayed just as the letter A. To define one of the following characters as a literal character, precede that character with
a back-slash. Text entry operation using Input Masks.
A keyboard entry using normal text entry is straightforward. However, once an input mask is applied, the behavior of the
keyboard needs to change to accommodate the input mask's requirement. When working with masks, any literal
characters in the mask will be "skipped" by any cursor movement, including cursor, backspace, and delete keys.
When operating with a mask, the mask should be displayed with placeholders. The "-" character should display where
you should enter a character. The arrow keys will move between the "-" characters and allow you to replace them. The
text entry code operates as if it is in the overwrite mode. If the cursor is positioned on a character already entered and you
type in a new (and valid) character, the new character replaces the old character. There is no shifting of characters.
When working with ranges specified by the [] mask, the keyboard allows you to enter a number between the values listed
in the ranges. If a user enters a value that is larger than the maximum, the maximum number of right-most characters is
used to create a new, acceptable value.
Example 1: If you type "125" into a field accepting 0-100, then the values displayed will be "1", "12", "25".
Example 2: If the max for the field was 20, then the values displayed will
be "1", "12", "5".
When data overflows from a numerical field, the overflow value is added to the previous field on the chain if the
overflow character was specified. In the above example, if the overflow flag was set, the first example will place the "1"
into the previous logical field and the second example will place "12" in the previous logical field. If the overflow field
already contains a value, the new value will be inserted to the right of the current characters and the overflow field will be
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
159
Appendix A: Text Formatting
evaluated. Overflow continues to work until a field with no overflow value is set or no more fields remain (i.e. reached
first field).
If a character is typed and that character appears in the Next Field list, the keyboard should move the focus to the next
field. For example, when entering time, a ":" is used as a next field character. If you enter "1:2", the 1 is entered in the
current field (hours) and then the focus is moved to the next field and 2 is entered in that field.
When entering time in a 12-hour format, entry of AM and PM is required. Instead of adding AM/PM to the input mask
specification, the AM/PM should be handled within the NetLinx code. This allows a programmer to show/hide and
provide discrete feedback for AM and PM.
Input mask output examples
The following are some common input masking examples:
Output Examples
Common Name
Input Mask
Input
IP Address Quad
[0|255]{.}
Any value from 0 to 255
Hour
[1|12]{:}
Any value from 1 to 12
Minute/Second
[0|59]{:}
Any value from 0 to 59
Frames
[0|29]{:}
Any value from 0 to 29
Phone Numbers
(999) 000-0000
(555) 555-5555
Zip Code
00000-9999
75082-4567
URL Resources
A URL can be broken into several parts. For example, with the URL http://www.amx.com/company-info-home.asp, this
URL indicates that the protocol in use is http (HyperText Transport Protocol) and that the information resides on a host
machine named www.amx.com. The image on that host machine is given an assignment (by the program) name of
company-info-home.asp (Active Server Page).
The exact meaning of this name on the host machine is both protocol dependent and host dependent. The information
normally resides in a file, but it could be generated dynamically. This component of the URL is called the file
component, even though the information is not necessarily in a file.
A URL can optionally specify a port, which is the port number to which the TCP/IP connection is made on the remote
host machine. If the port is not specified, the default port for the protocol is used instead. For example, the default port
for http is 80. An alternative port could be specified as: http://www.amx.com:8080/company-info-home.asp.
Any legal HTTP syntax can be used.
Special Escape Sequences
The system has only a limited knowledge of URL formats, as it transparently passes the URL information onto the server
for translation. A user can then pass any parameters to the server side programs such as CGI scripts or active server
pages.
However; the system will parse the URL looking for special escape codes. When it finds an escape code, it replaces that
code with a particular piece of panel, button, or state information.
For example, "http://www.amx.com/img.asp?device=$DV" would become http://www.amx.com/img.asp?device=10001.
160
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Appendix A: Text Formatting
Other used escape sequences include:
Escape Sequences
Sequence
Panel Information
$DV
Device Number
$SY
System Number
$IP
IP Address
$HN
Host Name
$MC
Mac Address
$ID
Neuron ID
$PX
X Resolution of current panel mode/file
$PY
Y Resolution of current panel mode/file
$BX
X Resolution of current button
$BY
Y Resolution of current button
$BN
Name of button
$ST
Current state
$AC
Address Code
$AP
Address Port
$CC
Channel Code
$CP
Channel Port
$LC
Level Code
$LP
Level Port
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
161
Appendix A: Text Formatting
162
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Appendix B - Wireless Technology
Appendix B - Wireless Technology
Overview of Wireless Technology
802.11b/2.4 GHz and 802.11a/5 GHz are the two major WLAN standards and both operate using radio
frequency (RF) technology. Together the two standards are together called Wi-Fi and operate in frequency
bands of 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz respectively.
The 802.11b specification was the first to be finalized and reach the marketplace. The actual throughput
obtained from an 802.11b network will typically be between 4 and 5 Mbps.
Because of the higher frequency (and thus shorter wavelength) that they use, 802.11a signals have a much
tougher time penetrating solid objects like walls, floors, and ceilings. As a result, the price for 802.11a's
higher speed is not only a shorter range but also a weaker and less consistent signal.
802.11g provides increased bandwidth at 54 Mbps. As part of the IEEE 802.11g specification, when
throughput cannot be maintained, this card will automatically switch algorithms in order to maintain the
highest spread possible at a given distance. In addition, 802.11g can also step down to utilize 802.11b
algorithms and also maintain a connection at longer distances.
IP Routing is a behavior of the wireless routing is largely dependent on the wired network interface.
Although the panel can be connected to two networks simultaneously, it may only have one gateway. If the
wired network was successfully set up and a gateway was obtained; then the default route for all network
traffic will be via the wired network. In the event that the wired network was not configured, then the default
route for all network traffic will be via the wireless network. The wired network connection always takes
priority.
Example: Imagine a panel connected to the two networks A & B. A is the wired network and B is the wireless
network. If the Master controller is on either of these networks, then it will be reached. However if the Master
controller is on a different network, C, then the gateway determines which network interface (wired or
wireless) will be used.
Wireless Access Points (WAPs) are the cornerstone of any wireless network. A WAP acts as a bridge
between a wired and wireless network. It aggregates the traffic from all wireless clients and forwards it down
the network to the switch or router. One WAP may be all that is necessary for a standard installation.
However, more WAPs may be needed, depending on the size of the installation, its layout, and its
construction.
Wireless Equivalent Privacy (WEP) Security is a method by which WLANs protect wireless data streams.
A data stream encrypted with WEP can still be intercepted or eavesdropped upon, but the encryption makes
the data unintelligible to the interloper. The strength of WEP is measured by the length of the key used to
encrypt the data. The longer the key, the harder it is to crack.
802.11b implementations provided 64-bit and 128-bit WEP keys. This is known respectively as 64-bit and
128-bit WEP encryption. 64-bit is generally not regarded as adequate security protection. Both key lengths
are supported by the Modero product line.
Whichever level of WEP used, using identical settings is crucial (CASE SENSITIVE)--the key length, and
the key itself-- on all devices. Only devices with common WEP settings will be able to communicate.
Similarly,
If one device has WEP enabled and another does no, they will not be able to talk to each other.
Although the calculations required to encrypt data with WEP can impact the performance of your wireless
network, this impact is generally only seen when running benchmarks, and is not large enough to be
noticeable in the course of normal network usage.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
163
Appendix B - Wireless Technology
Terminology
802.1x
IEEE 802.1x is an IEEE standard that is built on the Internet standard EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol). 802.1x
is a standard for passing EAP messages over either a wired or wireless LAN. Additionally, 802.1x is also responsible for
communicating the method with which WAPs and wireless users can share and change encryption keys. This continuous
key change helps resolve any major security vulnerabilities native to WEP.
AES
Short for Advanced Encryption Standard, is a cipher currently approved by the NSA to protect US Government
documents classified as Top Secret. The AES cipher is the first cipher protecting Top Secret information available to the
general public.
CERTIFICATES (CA)
A certificate can have many forms, but at the most basic level, a certificate is an identity combined with a public key, and
then signed by a certification authority. The certificate authority (CA) is a trusted external third party which "signs" or
validates the certificate. When a certificate has been signed, it gains some cryptographic properties. AMX supports the
following security certificates within three different formats:
PEM (Privacy Enhanced Mail)
DER (Distinguished Encoding Rules)
PKCS12 (Public Key Cryptography Standard #12)
Typical certificate information can include the following items:
Certificate Issue Date
Extensions
Issuer
Public Key
Serial Number
Signature Algorithm
User
Version
MIC
Short for Message Integrity Check, this prevents forged packets from being sent. Through WEP, it was possible to alter a
packet whose content was known even if it had not been decrypted.
TKIP
Short for Temporal Key Integration, this is part of the IEEE 802.11i encryption standard for wireless LANs. TKIP
provides a per-packet key mixing, message integrity check and re-keying mechanism, thus ensuring that every data
packet is sent with its own unique encryption key. Key mixing increases the complexity of decoding the keys by giving
the hacker much less data that has been encrypted using any one key.
WEP
Short for Wired Equivalent Privacy, WEP is a scheme used to secure wireless networks (Wi-Fi). A wireless network
broadcasts messages using radio which are particularly susceptible to hacker attacks. WEP was intended to provide the
confidentiality and security comparable to that of a traditional wired network. As a result of identified weaknesses in this
scheme, WEP was superseded by Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA), and then by the full IEEE 802.11i standard (also
known as WPA2).
WPA
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA and WPA2) is a class of system used to secure wireless (Wi-Fi) computer networks. It was
created in response to several serious weaknesses researchers had found in the previous WEP system. WPA implements
the majority of the IEEE 802.11i standard, and was intended as an intermediate measure to take the place of WEP while
802.11i was prepared (WPA2).
WPA is designed to work with all wireless network interface cards, but not necessarily with first generation wireless
access points.
To resolve problems with WEP, the Wi-Fi Alliance released WPA (FIG. 91), which integrated 802.1x, TKIP and MIC.
Within the WPA specifications, the RC4 cipher engine was maintained from WEP. RC4 is widely used in SSL (Secure
Socket Layer) to protect internet traffic.
164
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Appendix B - Wireless Technology
FIG. 91 WPA Overview
WPA2
Also know as IEEE 802.11i, this is an amendment to the 802.11 standard specifying security mechanisms for wireless
networks. The 802.11i scheme makes use of the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) block cipher; WEP and WPA use
the RC4 stream cipher.
The 802.11i architecture contains the following components: 802.1X for authentication (entailing the use of EAP and an
authentication server), RSN for keeping track of associations, and AES-based CCMP to provide confidentiality, integrity
and origin authentication.
WPA2 implements the full standard, but will not work with some older network cards. Both provide good security, with
two significant issues:
either WPA or WPA2 must be enabled and chosen in preference to WEP.
WEP is usually presented as the first security choice in most installation instructions.
in the "Personal" mode, the most likely choice for homes and small offices, a passphrase is required that, for
full security, must be longer than the typical 6 to 8 character passwords users are taught to employ.
With the RC4 released to the general public, the IEEE implemented the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) as the
cipher engine for 802.11i, which the Wi-Fi Alliance has branded as WPA2 (FIG. 92).
FIG. 92 WPA2 Overview
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
165
Appendix B - Wireless Technology
EAP Authentication
EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) is an Enterprise authentication protocol that can be used in both a wired and
wireless network environment. EAP requires the use of an 802.1x Authentication Server, also known as a RADIUS
server. Although over 40 different EAP methods are currently defined, the current internal Modero 802.11g wireless card
and accompanying firmware only support the following EAP methods (listed from simplest to most complex):
EAP-LEAP (Cisco Light EAP)
EAP-FAST (Cisco Flexible Authentication via Secure Tunneling, a.k.a. LEAPv2)
The following use certificates:
EAP-PEAP (Protected EAP)
EAP-TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Security)
EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security)
EAP requires the use of an 802.1x authentication server (also known as a RADIUS server). Sophisticated Access Points
(such as Cisco) can use a built-in RADIUS server. The most common RADIUS servers used in wireless networks today
are:
Microsoft Sever 2003
Juniper Odyssey (once called Funk Odyssey)
Meetinghouse AEGIS Server
DeviceScape RADIUS Server
Cisco Secure ACS
EAP Characteristics
The following table outlines the differences among the various EAP Methods from most secure (at the top of the list) to
the least secure (at the bottom of the list):
EAP Method Characteristics
Method:
Credential Type:
Authentication:
Pros:
Cons:
EAP-TLS
• Certificates
• Certificate is based on a
two-way authentication
• Highest
Security
• Difficult to
deploy
EAP-TTLS
• Certificates
• Client authentication is
done via password and
certificates
• High Security
• Moderately
difficult to
deploy
• High Security
• Moderately
difficult to
deploy
• Fixed Passwords
• One-time passwords
(tokens)
EAP-PEAP
• Certificates
• Fixed Passwords
• One-time passwords
(tokens)
EAP-LEAP
• Certificates
• Client authentication is
done via password and
certificates
• Server authentication is
done via certificates
• One-time passwords
(tokens)
• Authentication is based on • Easy
deployment
MS-CHAP and
MS-CHAPv2
authentication protocols
• Susceptible to
dictionary
attacks
• Certificates
• N/A
• N/A
• Fixed Passwords
EAP-FAST
• Server authentication is
done via certificates
• N/A
• Fixed Passwords
• One-time passwords
(tokens)
166
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Appendix B - Wireless Technology
EAP Communication Overview
EAP Authentication goes a step beyond just encrypting data transfers, but also requires that a set of credentials be
validated before the client (panel) is allowed to connect to the rest of the network (FIG. 93). Below is a description of
this process. It is important to note that no user intervention is necessary during this process. It proceeds automatically
based on the configuration parameters entered into the panel.
LAN
802.1x
(EAP Over Wireless)
Client - Panel
(Supplicant)
Authenticator
(Wireless Access Point)
Authentication Server
(RADIUS Server)
FIG. 93 EAP security method in process
1. The client (panel) establishes a wireless connection with the WAP specified by the SSID.
2. The WAP opens up a tunnel between itself and the RADIUS server configured via the access point. This tunnel
means that packets can flow between the panel and the RADIUS server but nowhere else. The network is protected
until authentication of the client (panel) is complete and the ID of the client is verified.
3. The WAP (Authenticator) sends an "EAP-Request/Identity" message to the panel as soon as the wireless connection
becomes active.
4. The panel then sends a "EAP-Response/Identity" message through the WAP to the RADIUS server providing its
identity and specifying which EAP type it wants to use. If the server does not support the EAP type, then it sends a
failure message back to the WAP which will then disconnect the panel. As an example, EAP-FAST is only
supported by the Cisco server.
5. If the EAP type is supported, the server then sends a message back to the client (panel) indicating what information
it needs. This can be as simple as a username (Identity) and password or as complex as multiple CA certificates.
6. The panel then responds with the requested information. If everything matches, and the panel provides the proper
credentials, the RADIUS server then sends a success message to the access point instructing it to allow the panel to
communicate with other devices on the network. At this point, the WAP completes the process for allowing LAN
Access to the panel (possibly a restricted access based on attributes that came back from the RADIUS server).
As an example, the WAP might switch the panel to a particular VLAN or install a set of farewell rules.
Configuring Modero Firmware via the USB Port
The MVP-5200i needs to be configured to connect with a PC to transfer firmware via the mini-USB port. To configure
the touch panel:
Step 1: Configure The Panel For a USB Connection Type
1. After completing the installation of the USB driver (for more information, refer to the Upgrading the Modero
Firmware via the USB port section on page 40), confirm the proper installation of the large Type-A USB connector
to the PC's USB port, and restart your computer.
2. After the panel powers up, hold the reset button to display the Setup Page (for more information, refer to the
Accessing the Setup and Protected Setup Pages section on page 19 ) and open the Protected Setup page.
3. Press System Settings to open the System Settings page.
4. Toggle the blue Type field in the Master Connection section until the choice cycles to USB.
ALL fields are then greyed out and read-only. However, they still display any previous
network information.
5. Press the Back button on the touch panel to return to the Protected Setup page.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
167
Appendix B - Wireless Technology
6. Press the Reboot button both to save any changes and to restart the panel. Remember that the panel’s connection
type must be set to USB prior to rebooting the panel and prior to inserting the USB connector.
7. ONLY AFTER the unit displays the first panel page should you THEN insert the mini-USB connector into the
Mini-USB Port on the panel. It may take a minute for the panel to detect the new connection and send a signal to the
PC, indicated by a green System Connection icon.
If a few minutes have gone by and the System Connection icon still does not turn green, complete the
procedures in the following section to set up the Virtual Master and refresh the System from the Online Tree.
This action sends out a request to the panel to respond and completes the communication, turning the System
Connection icon green.
8. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to return to the System Settings page
Step 2: Prepare NetLinx Studio For Communication Via the USB Port
1. From the Start menu in Windows XP, open the Network Connections dialog (Start > Settings > Network
Connections > Local Area Connection).
2. Look for the Local Area Connection reading Local Area Connection, AMX USB Device Link and double-click on it
to open the Local Status.
3. Press the Properties tab to open the Local Area Connection Properties section.
4. Press the Properties button to open the TCP/IP Properties dialog box.
5. Set the IP address to an address within the same subnet as the panel IP address specified within the USB IP settings
of the panel. For instance, if the default IP address on the device is 12.0.0.2, set the IP address to 12.0.0.1.
6. Set the Subnet Mask to 255.255.255.0.
7. In the TCP/IP Properties dialog box, click OK.
8. In the Local Area Connection Properties, section, click Close.
AMX Certificate Upload Utility
The Certificate Upload utility gives you the ability to compile a list of target touch panels, select a pre-obtained
certificate (uniquely identifying the panel), and then upload that file to the selected panel.
This application must be run from a local machine and should not be used from a
remote network location.
This application ensures that a unique certificate is securely uploaded to a specific touch panel. Currently, the target
panels must be capable of supporting the WPA-PSK and EAP-XXX wireless security formats.
The Certificate Upload utility supports the following capabilities:
Ability to browse both a local and network drive to find a desired certificate file.
Ability to create a list of target AMX G4 touch panels based on IP Addresses.
Ability to display the IP Address of the local computer hosting the application.
Ability to load a previously created list of target touch panels.
Ability to save the current list of target Modero panel as a file.
Ability to track the progress of the certificate upload by noting the current data size being transmitted and any
associated error messages (if any).
The Certificate Upload Utility recognizes the following certificate file types:
CER (Certificate File)
DER (Distinguished Encoding Rules)
PEM (Privacy Enhanced Mail)
PFX (Normal Windows generated certificate)
PVK (Private Key file)
168
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Appendix B - Wireless Technology
Uploading a Certificate File
1. Install the latest AMX USB LAN LINK driver onto your computer by installing the latest versions of either
TPDesign4 or NetLinx Studio2. This USB driver prepares your computer for proper communication with the panel.
Refer to Step 1 from within the Upgrading the Docking Station Firmware via USB section on page 43.
2.
Access the target panel's Protected Setup firmware page and configure the USB communication parameters.
3. With the panel successfully communicating with the target computer, launch the Certificate Upload Utility.
Familiarize yourself with the Certificate Utility User Interface options.
4. Locate your certificate file by using the Browse button and navigating to the desired file type.
5. Use the drop-down arrow in the Local Address field to select direct communication through the USB port.
6. Select the 10.XX.XX.1 IP Address that corresponds to the virtual IP Address assigned to the USB connection port
on the computer.
7. Navigate to the Add IP Address field at the bottom-right of the interface and enter a value of 1 greater than the
virtual USB IP Address.
For example: If the virtual USB IP Address is 10.0.0.1, then add an address for the directly connected panel of
10.0.0.2. This is one greater than the USB address value detected by the utility.
A certificate may be sent to ONLY ONE directly connected panel via USB.
Use the Ethernet port’s IP Address to send a server certificate to multiple panel targets.
8. Select the IP Address which corresponds to the local computer's Ethernet address.
9. Navigate to the Add IP Address field (bottom-right of the interface) and enter the IP Addresses of the various target
touch panels.
10. Click the Add button to complete the entry and add the new IP Address to the listing of available device IP
Addresses. Repeat this process for all subsequent device IP Addresses.
11. Once the list is complete, click on the File drop-down menu and select the Save option. This launches a Save dialog
to assign a name to the current list of addresses and then save the information as a TXT (text) file to a known
location.
This application must be run from a local machine and should not be used from a
remote network location.
12. Select the target devices to be uploaded with the selected certificate. These may be:
individually selected by toggling the box next to the Send entry (with the Type column).
selected as a group by clicking on the Check All radio box located at the top of the device IP Address listing.
13. When ready to send the certificate file to the selected panels, click the Send button to initiate the upload.
Once the Status field for each entry reads Done, the upload was successfully completed.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
169
Appendix B - Wireless Technology
170
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Appendix C: Troubleshooting
Appendix C: Troubleshooting
Overview
This section describes the solutions to possible hardware/firmware issues that could arise during the common operation
of a Modero touch panel.
Panel Doesn’t Respond To Touches
Symptom: The device either does not respond to touches on the touch screen or does not register the touch as being in
the correct area of the screen.
If the screen is off:
The device may be in Standby Mode. Press and hold the navigation wheel to wake up the panel.
The device may be in Shutdown Mode. Press and hold the center button on the navigation wheel until the
device turns on.
The device battery may be drained. Place the device into a Table Charging Station or a Wall Charging Station,
or connect it to its included power source to recharge the battery.
If the screen is on:
The protective laminate coating may still be on the LCD. Verify that the coating on the LCD is removed
before beginning any calibration process. The protective cover makes calibration difficult because the device
cannot calibrate on specific crosshairs when the sheet is pressing on the whole LCD.
The previous calibration may be off. Reset the device calibration, as explained in the Calibration Page section
on page 72.
Battery Will Not Hold Or Take A Charge
Symptom: The battery will not hold or take a charge and shows no indication of charging, either on the bargraphs or in
the Battery Setup page.
To keep the battery from being damaged from operating at too low a level, the firmware places it into a protected state.
The panel must have the latest firmware. If it doesn’t, the firmware can be found at www.amx.com Dealers/Tech Center
> Firmware Files.> Modero.
1. Load the firmware into the panel, using NetLinx Studio.
2. After loading the firmware, power cycle the MVP (this is a complete power cycle, not a Reboot). The panel will
now show the current firmware version within the Setup > Panel Information page.
3. Connect the power supply to the panel. You will see 2 warning messages on the display.
The first one warns that the battery is low and must be charged.
The second warning tells you that the battery is in a protected mode.
4. Wait a few minutes and then check the Battery Settings page on the device to see any charging activity on the bar
graphs. (For more information, refer to the Battery Settings/Batteries section on page 92).
The "Sensor" device in the Online Tree tab below the MVP panel should show v1.24 or higher after the upgrade, as
shown in FIG. 94:
FIG. 94 "Sensor" device in the Online Tree tab
Panel Isn’t Appearing In The Online Tree Tab
1. Verify that the System number is the same on both the NetLinx Project Navigator window and the System Settings
page on the device.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
171
Appendix C: Troubleshooting
2. Verify the proper NetLinx Master IP and connection methods entered into the Master Connection section of the
System Settings page.
MVP Can’t Obtain a DHCP Address
In requesting a DHCP Address, the DHCP Server can take up to a few minutes to provide the address.
1. Verify that the WAP is configured to match the MVP panel Network Name (SSID) field, Encryption, Default Key,
and Current Key string.
Remember that the Passphrase generator on the panel does not produce the same
Current Key if using the same passphrase on the WAP.
2. In NetLinx Studio, select Diagnostics > Network Address and verify the System number.
3. If the IP Address field is still empty, give the device a few minutes to negotiate a DHCP Address and try again.
My WEP Doesn’t Seem To Be Working
WEP will not work unless the same default key is set on both the panel and the Wireless Access Point (WAP).
For example, if the access point was set to default WEP key 4 (which was 01:02:03:04:05), the Modero’s Default WEP
key 4 must be set to 01:02:03:04:05.
NetLinx Studio Only Detects One Of My Connected Masters
Each Master is given a Device Address of 00000.
Only one Master can be assigned to a particular System number. If you want to work with multiple Masters, open
different instances of NetLinx Studio and assign each Master its own System value.
Example: A site has an NXC-ME260/64 and an NI-4000. In order to work with both units. The ME260 can be assigned
System #1 and the NI-4000 can then be assigned System #2 using two open sessions of NetLinx Studio v 2.x.
Can’t Connect To a NetLinx Master
Symptom: I can’t seem to connect to a NetLinx Master using NetLinx Studio 2.
Select Settings > Master Comm Settings > Communication Settings > Settings (for TCP/IP), and uncheck the
"Automatically Ping the Master Controller to ensure availability".
The pinging is to determine if the Master is available and to reply with a connection failure instantly if it is not. Without
using the ping feature, a connection may still be attempted, but a failure will take longer to be recognized.
If you are trying to connect to a Master controller that is behind a firewall, you may
have to uncheck this option. Most firewalls will not allow ping requests to pass
through for security reasons.
When connecting to a NetLinx Master controller via TCP/IP, the program will first try to ping the controller before
attempting a connection. Pinging a device is relatively fast and will determine if the device is off-line, or if the TCP/IP
address that was entered was incorrect.
If you decide not to ping for availability and the controller is off-line, or you have an incorrect TCP/IP address, the
program will try for 30-45 seconds to establish a connection.
Only One Modero Panel In My System Shows Up
Symptom: I have more than one Modero panel connected to my System Master and only one shows up.
Multiple NetLinx Compatible devices, such as MVP panels, can be associated for use with a single Master. Each panel
comes with a defaulted Device Number value of 10001. When using multiple panels, different Device Number values
have to be assigned to each panel.
1. Press and hold the two lower buttons on both sides of the display for 3 seconds to open the Setup page.
2. Press the Protected Setup button (located on the lower-left of the panel page), enter 1988 into the on-screen
Keypad’s password field, and press Done when finished.
3. Enter a Device Number value for the panel into the Device Number Keypad. The default is 10001 and the range is
from 1 - 32000.
Panel Behaves Strangely After Downloading A Panel File Or Firmware
Symptom: After downloading a panel file or firmware to a G4 device, the panel behaves strangely.
172
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Appendix C: Troubleshooting
If the panel already contains a large enough file, subsequent downloads will take up more space than is available and
could often corrupt the Compact Flash. The demo file that typically ships with G4 panels is one such file.
Symptoms include:
Having to repeat the download.
Inability to make further downloads to the panel. May get "directory" errors, "graphics hierarchy" errors, etc.,
indicating problems with the Compact Flash.
Panel will not boot, or gets stuck on "AMX" splash screen.
Other problems also started after downloading to a new panel or a panel with a TPD4 file that takes up a considerable
amount of the available Compact Flash.
1. DO NOT download TPD4 files (of large size) over the demo pages, or any other large TPD4 file.
2. First download a small blank one page file to the G4 panel using the Normal Transfer option to send/download the
page.
3. Reboot the device.
4. Do your regular file or firmware download.
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
173
Appendix C: Troubleshooting
174
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
Appendix C: Troubleshooting
MVP-7500/8400 Modero Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels
175
2/13 ©2013 AMX. All rights reserved. AMX and the AMX logo are registered trademarks of AMX. AMX reserves the right to alter specifications without notice at any time.
It’s Your World - Take Control™
3000 RESEARCH DRIVE, RICHARDSON, TX 75082 USA • 800.222.0193 • 469.624.8000 • 469-624-7153 fax • 800.932.6993 technical support • www.amx.com
Download PDF

advertising